blob: c69b03884719732ddf737bdde45393b6a84cef4a [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00001//===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===//
2//
3// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00007//
8//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9//
10// This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for
Gordon Henriksen829046b2008-05-08 17:46:35 +000011// SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's
12// basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000013//
14//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
15
Quentin Colombeta3490842014-02-22 00:07:45 +000016#include "llvm/CodeGen/Passes.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruth62d42152015-01-15 02:16:27 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h"
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth219b89b2014-03-04 11:01:28 +000023#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000024#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
25#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
26#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Chandler Carruth5ad5f152014-01-13 09:26:24 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Chandler Carruth03eb0de2014-03-04 10:40:04 +000029#include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000030#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +000034#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000035#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h"
Chandler Carruth4220e9c2014-03-04 11:17:44 +000037#include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h"
Chandler Carrutha4ea2692014-03-04 11:26:31 +000038#include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h"
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000039#include "llvm/Pass.h"
Evan Cheng8b637b12010-08-17 01:34:49 +000040#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +000041#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000042#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000043#include "llvm/Target/TargetLowering.h"
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +000044#include "llvm/Target/TargetSubtargetInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
46#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BuildLibCalls.h"
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +000049#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h"
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000050using namespace llvm;
Chris Lattnerd616ef52008-11-25 04:42:10 +000051using namespace llvm::PatternMatch;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +000052
Chandler Carruth1b9dde02014-04-22 02:02:50 +000053#define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare"
54
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000055STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000056STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim, "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated");
57STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim, "Number of GEPs converted to casts");
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +000058STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of "
59 "sunken Cmps");
60STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses "
61 "of sunken Casts");
62STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address "
63 "computations were sunk");
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +000064STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved, "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads");
65STATISTIC(NumExtUses, "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized");
66STATISTIC(NumRetsDup, "Number of return instructions duplicated");
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +000067STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved");
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +000068STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches");
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +000069STATISTIC(NumAndCmpsMoved, "Number of and/cmp's pushed into branches");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000070STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed");
Jakob Stoklund Oleseneb12f492010-09-30 20:51:52 +000071
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +000072static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts(
73 "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
74 cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
75
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +000076static cl::opt<bool>
77 DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
78 cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
79
Benjamin Kramer3d38c172012-05-06 14:25:16 +000080static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch(
81 "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
82 cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion."));
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +000083
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +000084static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs(
85 "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs."));
87
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +000088static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking(
89 "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
90 cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches."));
91
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +000092static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract(
93 "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
94 cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
95
96static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract(
97 "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
98 cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare"));
99
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000100static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion(
101 "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
102 cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in "
103 "CodeGenPrepare"));
104
105static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion(
106 "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
107 cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) "
108 "optimization in CodeGenPrepare"));
109
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000110namespace {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000111typedef SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> SetOfInstrs;
Benjamin Kramer4cd5faa2015-07-31 17:00:39 +0000112typedef PointerIntPair<Type *, 1, bool> TypeIsSExt;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +0000113typedef DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt> InstrToOrigTy;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000114class TypePromotionTransaction;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000115
Chris Lattner2dd09db2009-09-02 06:11:42 +0000116 class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass {
Bill Wendling7a639ea2013-06-19 21:07:11 +0000117 const TargetMachine *TM;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000118 const TargetLowering *TLI;
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +0000119 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI;
Chad Rosierc24b86f2011-12-01 03:08:23 +0000120 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000121
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000122 /// As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the next instruction
123 /// to optimize. Transforms that can invalidate this should update it.
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +0000124 BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator;
Evan Cheng3b3de7c2008-12-19 18:03:11 +0000125
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000126 /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block.
127 /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with
128 /// multiple load/stores of the same address.
Nick Lewycky5fb19632013-05-08 09:00:10 +0000129 ValueMap<Value*, Value*> SunkAddrs;
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000130
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +0000131 /// Keeps track of all instructions inserted for the current function.
132 SetOfInstrs InsertedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000133 /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their
134 /// promotion for the current function.
135 InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts;
136
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000137 /// True if CFG is modified in any way.
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000138 bool ModifiedDT;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000139
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000140 /// True if optimizing for size.
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +0000141 bool OptSize;
142
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +0000143 /// DataLayout for the Function being processed.
144 const DataLayout *DL;
145
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000146 public:
Nick Lewyckye7da2d62007-05-06 13:37:16 +0000147 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +0000148 explicit CodeGenPrepare(const TargetMachine *TM = nullptr)
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +0000149 : FunctionPass(ID), TM(TM), TLI(nullptr), TTI(nullptr), DL(nullptr) {
Owen Anderson6c18d1a2010-10-19 17:21:58 +0000150 initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry());
151 }
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000152 bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000153
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000154 const char *getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; }
Evan Cheng99cafb12012-12-21 01:48:14 +0000155
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +0000156 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override {
Chandler Carruth73523022014-01-13 13:07:17 +0000157 AU.addPreserved<DominatorTreeWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000158 AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>();
Chandler Carruth705b1852015-01-31 03:43:40 +0000159 AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>();
Andreas Neustifterf8cb7582009-09-16 09:26:52 +0000160 }
161
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000162 private:
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000163 bool eliminateFallThrough(Function &F);
164 bool eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F);
165 bool canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const;
166 void eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB);
167 bool optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool& ModifiedDT);
168 bool optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool& ModifiedDT);
169 bool optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *I, Value *Addr,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +0000170 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000171 bool optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS);
172 bool optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool& ModifiedDT);
173 bool moveExtToFormExtLoad(Instruction *&I);
174 bool optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I);
175 bool optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI);
176 bool optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SI);
177 bool optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst);
178 bool dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB);
179 bool placeDbgValues(Function &F);
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000180 bool sinkAndCmp(Function &F);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000181 bool extLdPromotion(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, LoadInst *&LI,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +0000182 Instruction *&Inst,
183 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +0000184 unsigned CreatedInstCost);
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000185 bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000186 bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I);
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +0000187 void stripInvariantGroupMetadata(Instruction &I);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000188 };
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000189}
Devang Patel09f162c2007-05-01 21:15:47 +0000190
Devang Patel8c78a0b2007-05-03 01:11:54 +0000191char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0;
Jiangning Liud623c522014-06-11 07:04:37 +0000192INITIALIZE_TM_PASS(CodeGenPrepare, "codegenprepare",
193 "Optimize for code generation", false, false)
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000194
Bill Wendling7a639ea2013-06-19 21:07:11 +0000195FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass(const TargetMachine *TM) {
196 return new CodeGenPrepare(TM);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000197}
198
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000199bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) {
Paul Robinson7c99ec52014-03-31 17:43:35 +0000200 if (skipOptnoneFunction(F))
201 return false;
202
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +0000203 DL = &F.getParent()->getDataLayout();
204
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000205 bool EverMadeChange = false;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000206 // Clear per function information.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +0000207 InsertedInsts.clear();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +0000208 PromotedInsts.clear();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000209
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +0000210 ModifiedDT = false;
Eric Christopherd9134482014-08-04 21:25:23 +0000211 if (TM)
Eric Christopherfccff372015-01-27 01:01:38 +0000212 TLI = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F)->getTargetLowering();
Chandler Carruthb98f63d2015-01-15 10:41:28 +0000213 TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI();
Chandler Carruthfdb9c572015-02-01 12:01:35 +0000214 TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F);
Sanjay Patel82d91dd2015-08-11 19:39:36 +0000215 OptSize = F.optForSize();
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000216
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000217 /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be
218 /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide.
Preston Gurd485296d2013-03-04 18:13:57 +0000219 if (!OptSize && TLI && TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) {
Preston Gurd0d67f512012-10-04 21:33:40 +0000220 const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths =
221 TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths();
Evan Cheng71be12b2012-09-14 21:25:34 +0000222 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); I++)
Preston Gurd0d67f512012-10-04 21:33:40 +0000223 EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(F, I, BypassWidths);
Preston Gurdcdf540d2012-09-04 18:22:17 +0000224 }
225
226 // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000227 // unconditional branch.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000228 EverMadeChange |= eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000229
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000230 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000231 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000232 // find a node corresponding to the value.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000233 EverMadeChange |= placeDbgValues(F);
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +0000234
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000235 // If there is a mask, compare against zero, and branch that can be combined
236 // into a single target instruction, push the mask and compare into branch
237 // users. Do this before OptimizeBlock -> OptimizeInst ->
238 // OptimizeCmpExpression, which perturbs the pattern being searched for.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000239 if (!DisableBranchOpts) {
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000240 EverMadeChange |= sinkAndCmp(F);
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +0000241 EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F);
242 }
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +0000243
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000244 bool MadeChange = true;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000245 while (MadeChange) {
246 MadeChange = false;
Hans Wennborg02fbc712012-09-19 07:48:16 +0000247 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) {
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000248 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000249 bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000250 MadeChange |= optimizeBlock(*BB, ModifiedDTOnIteration);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000251
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000252 // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +0000253 if (ModifiedDTOnIteration)
254 break;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +0000255 }
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000256 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
257 }
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +0000258
259 SunkAddrs.clear();
260
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000261 if (!DisableBranchOpts) {
262 MadeChange = false;
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000263 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +0000264 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
265 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB));
266 MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true);
Bill Wendling97b93592012-03-04 10:46:01 +0000267 if (!MadeChange) continue;
268
269 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
270 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
271 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
272 WorkList.insert(*II);
273 }
274
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000275 // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors.
Bill Wendlingab417b62012-12-06 00:30:20 +0000276 MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty();
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000277 while (!WorkList.empty()) {
278 BasicBlock *BB = *WorkList.begin();
279 WorkList.erase(BB);
280 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
281
282 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +0000283
Bill Wendlingf3614fd2012-11-28 23:23:48 +0000284 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator
285 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II)
286 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II))
287 WorkList.insert(*II);
288 }
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000289
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000290 // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by
291 // a single edge.
292 if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000293 MadeChange |= eliminateFallThrough(F);
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000294
Cameron Zwarich338d3622011-03-11 21:52:04 +0000295 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange;
296 }
297
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000298 if (!DisableGCOpts) {
299 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints;
300 for (BasicBlock &BB : F)
301 for (Instruction &I : BB)
302 if (isStatepoint(I))
303 Statepoints.push_back(&I);
304 for (auto &I : Statepoints)
305 EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I);
306 }
307
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000308 return EverMadeChange;
309}
310
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000311/// Merge basic blocks which are connected by a single edge, where one of the
312/// basic blocks has a single successor pointing to the other basic block,
313/// which has a single predecessor.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000314bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateFallThrough(Function &F) {
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000315 bool Changed = false;
316 // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000317 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000318 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
319 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial
320 // edge, just collapse it.
321 BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
322
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +0000323 // Don't merge if BB's address is taken.
324 if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000325
326 BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator());
327 if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) {
328 Changed = true;
Michael Liao6e12d122012-08-21 05:55:22 +0000329 DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n"<< *SinglePred << "\n\n\n");
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000330 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function.
331 // If so, we will need to move BB back to the entry position.
332 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000333 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(BB, nullptr);
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000334
335 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
336 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
337
338 // We have erased a block. Update the iterator.
339 I = BB;
Nadav Rotem70409992012-08-14 05:19:07 +0000340 }
341 }
342 return Changed;
343}
344
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000345/// Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes, debug info directives, and an
346/// unconditional branch. Passes before isel (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split
347/// edges in ways that are non-optimal for isel. Start by eliminating these
348/// blocks so we can split them the way we want them.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000349bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) {
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000350 bool MadeChange = false;
351 // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block.
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +0000352 for (Function::iterator I = std::next(F.begin()), E = F.end(); I != E;) {
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000353 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
354
355 // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it.
356 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
357 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional())
358 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000359
Dale Johannesen4026b042009-03-27 01:13:37 +0000360 // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi
361 // node, then other stuff is happening here.
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000362 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI;
363 if (BBI != BB->begin()) {
364 --BBI;
Dale Johannesen4026b042009-03-27 01:13:37 +0000365 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) {
366 if (BBI == BB->begin())
367 break;
368 --BBI;
369 }
370 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI))
371 continue;
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000372 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000373
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000374 // Do not break infinite loops.
375 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
376 if (DestBB == BB)
377 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000378
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000379 if (!canMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB))
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000380 continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000381
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000382 eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000383 MadeChange = true;
384 }
385 return MadeChange;
386}
387
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000388/// Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a single
389/// unconditional branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000390/// instructions.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000391bool CodeGenPrepare::canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB,
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000392 const BasicBlock *DestBB) const {
393 // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in
394 // the successor. If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders),
395 // don't mess around with them.
396 BasicBlock::const_iterator BBI = BB->begin();
397 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000398 for (const User *U : PN->users()) {
399 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
400 if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI))
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000401 return false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000402 // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check
403 // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000404 // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000405 if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) {
406 if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI))
Devang Pateld3208522007-04-25 00:37:04 +0000407 for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
408 Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I));
409 if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB &&
410 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I))
411 return false;
412 }
413 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000414 }
415 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000416
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000417 // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB
418 // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block. If so, we
419 // can't merge the block.
420 const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin());
421 if (!DestBBPN) return true; // no conflict.
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000422
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000423 // Collect the preds of BB.
Chris Lattner8201a9b2007-11-06 22:07:40 +0000424 SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds;
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000425 if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
426 // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator.
427 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
428 BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
429 } else {
430 BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
431 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000432
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000433 // Walk the preds of DestBB.
434 for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
435 BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i);
436 if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) { // Common predecessor?
437 BBI = DestBB->begin();
438 while (const PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI++)) {
439 const Value *V1 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
440 const Value *V2 = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000441
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000442 // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be.
443 if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2))
444 if (V2PN->getParent() == BB)
445 V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000446
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000447 // If there is a conflict, bail out.
448 if (V1 != V2) return false;
449 }
450 }
451 }
452
453 return true;
454}
455
456
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000457/// Eliminate a basic block that has only phi's and an unconditional branch in
458/// it.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +0000459void CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000460 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
461 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000462
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000463 DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n" << *BB << *DestBB);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000464
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000465 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge,
466 // just collapse it.
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000467 if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000468 if (SinglePred != DestBB) {
469 // Remember if SinglePred was the entry block of the function. If so, we
470 // will need to move BB back to the entry position.
471 bool isEntry = SinglePred == &SinglePred->getParent()->getEntryBlock();
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +0000472 MergeBasicBlockIntoOnlyPred(DestBB, nullptr);
Chris Lattner4059f432008-11-27 19:29:14 +0000473
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000474 if (isEntry && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock())
475 BB->moveBefore(&BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock());
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +0000476
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000477 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattner8a172da2008-11-28 19:54:49 +0000478 return;
479 }
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000480 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000481
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000482 // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB. Update the PHIs in DestBB
483 // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have.
484 PHINode *PN;
485 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = DestBB->begin();
486 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
487 // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it.
488 Value *InVal = PN->removeIncomingValue(BB, false);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000489
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000490 // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some
491 // value that dominates BB.
492 PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal);
493 if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) {
494 // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi.
495 for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
496 PN->addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i),
497 InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i));
498 } else {
499 // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that
500 // we will be adding.
501 if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
502 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
503 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i));
504 } else {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000505 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
506 PN->addIncoming(InVal, *PI);
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000507 }
508 }
509 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000510
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000511 // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use
512 // DestBB and remove BB.
513 BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB);
514 BB->eraseFromParent();
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000515 ++NumBlocksElim;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000516
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +0000517 DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n");
Chris Lattnerc3748562007-04-02 01:35:34 +0000518}
519
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000520// Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding
521// derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls
522static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(
523 const SmallVectorImpl<User *> &AllRelocateCalls,
524 DenseMap<IntrinsicInst *, SmallVector<IntrinsicInst *, 2>> &
525 RelocateInstMap) {
526 // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object
527 // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding
528 // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls
529 DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, IntrinsicInst *> RelocateIdxMap;
530 for (auto &U : AllRelocateCalls) {
531 GCRelocateOperands ThisRelocate(U);
532 IntrinsicInst *I = cast<IntrinsicInst>(U);
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000533 auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate.getBasePtrIndex(),
534 ThisRelocate.getDerivedPtrIndex());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000535 RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, I));
536 }
537 for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) {
538 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first;
539 if (Key.first == Key.second)
540 // Base relocation: nothing to insert
541 continue;
542
543 IntrinsicInst *I = Item.second;
544 auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first);
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000545
546 // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it.
547 auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey);
548 if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end())
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000549 // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off
550 // that, if there are enough derived object relocates.
551 continue;
Sanjoy Dasb8186762015-02-27 02:24:16 +0000552
553 RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000554 }
555}
556
557// Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all
558// small integer constants
559static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP,
560 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) {
561 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) {
562 // Only accept small constant integer operands
563 auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i));
564 if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20)
565 return false;
566 }
567
568 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++)
569 OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i));
570 return true;
571}
572
573// Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to
574// replace, computes a replacement, and affects it.
575static bool
576simplifyRelocatesOffABase(IntrinsicInst *RelocatedBase,
577 const SmallVectorImpl<IntrinsicInst *> &Targets) {
578 bool MadeChange = false;
579 for (auto &ToReplace : Targets) {
580 GCRelocateOperands MasterRelocate(RelocatedBase);
581 GCRelocateOperands ThisRelocate(ToReplace);
582
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000583 assert(ThisRelocate.getBasePtrIndex() == MasterRelocate.getBasePtrIndex() &&
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000584 "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object");
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000585 if (ThisRelocate.getBasePtrIndex() == ThisRelocate.getDerivedPtrIndex()) {
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000586 // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates.
587 continue;
588 }
589
Sanjoy Das499d7032015-05-06 02:36:26 +0000590 Value *Base = ThisRelocate.getBasePtr();
591 auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ThisRelocate.getDerivedPtr());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000592 if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base)
593 continue;
594
595 SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV;
596 if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV))
597 continue;
598
599 // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep
Sanjoy Das3d705e32015-05-11 23:47:30 +0000600 assert(RelocatedBase->getNextNode() && "Should always have one since it's not a terminator");
601
602 // Insert after RelocatedBase
603 IRBuilder<> Builder(RelocatedBase->getNextNode());
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000604 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc());
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000605
606 // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type.
607 // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not
608 // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be
609 // cases like this:
610 // bb1:
611 // ...
612 // %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
613 // br label %merge
614 //
615 // bb2:
616 // ...
617 // %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...)
618 // br label %merge
619 //
620 // merge:
621 // %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ]
622 // %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)*
623 //
624 // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast
625 // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and
626 // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes.
627 Instruction *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase;
628 if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) {
629 ActualRelocatedBase =
630 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType()));
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000631 }
David Blaikie68d535c2015-03-24 22:38:16 +0000632 Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP(
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000633 Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV));
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000634 Instruction *ReplacementInst = cast<Instruction>(Replacement);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000635 Replacement->takeName(ToReplace);
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000636 // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived
637 // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above.
638 Instruction *ActualReplacement = ReplacementInst;
639 if (ReplacementInst->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) {
640 ActualReplacement =
641 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBitCast(ReplacementInst, ToReplace->getType()));
Sanjoy Das89c54912015-05-11 18:49:34 +0000642 }
643 ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement);
Ramkumar Ramachandradba73292015-01-14 23:27:07 +0000644 ToReplace->eraseFromParent();
645
646 MadeChange = true;
647 }
648 return MadeChange;
649}
650
651// Turns this:
652//
653// %base = ...
654// %ptr = gep %base + 15
655// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
656// %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
657// %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5)
658// %val = load %ptr'
659//
660// into this:
661//
662// %base = ...
663// %ptr = gep %base + 15
664// %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr)
665// %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4)
666// %ptr' = gep %base' + 15
667// %val = load %ptr'
668bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) {
669 bool MadeChange = false;
670 SmallVector<User *, 2> AllRelocateCalls;
671
672 for (auto *U : I.users())
673 if (isGCRelocate(dyn_cast<Instruction>(U)))
674 // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint
675 AllRelocateCalls.push_back(U);
676
677 // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer
678 // relocation to mangle
679 if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2)
680 return false;
681
682 // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the
683 // corresponding derived relocate instructions
684 DenseMap<IntrinsicInst *, SmallVector<IntrinsicInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap;
685 computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap);
686 if (RelocateInstMap.empty())
687 return false;
688
689 for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap)
690 // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against
691 // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace
692 MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second);
693 return MadeChange;
694}
695
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +0000696/// SinkCast - Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks
697static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000698 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000699
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000700 /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000701 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000702
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000703 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000704 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000705 UI != E; ) {
706 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
707 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000708
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000709 // Figure out which BB this cast is used in. For PHI's this is the
710 // appropriate predecessor block.
711 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
712 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000713 UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000714 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000715
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000716 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
717 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000718
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000719 // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast.
720 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000721
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000722 // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it.
723 CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB];
724
725 if (!InsertedCast) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +0000726 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000727 InsertedCast =
728 CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0), CI->getType(), "",
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000729 InsertPt);
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000730 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000731
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000732 // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast.
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000733 TheUse = InsertedCast;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000734 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000735 ++NumCastUses;
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000736 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000737
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000738 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast.
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +0000739 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000740 CI->eraseFromParent();
Duncan Sandsafa84da42008-01-20 16:51:46 +0000741 MadeChange = true;
742 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000743
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +0000744 return MadeChange;
745}
746
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000747/// If the specified cast instruction is a noop copy (e.g. it's casting from
748/// one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC), sink it into user blocks to
749/// reduce the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced.
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +0000750///
751/// Return true if any changes are made.
752///
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +0000753static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI,
754 const DataLayout &DL) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +0000755 // If this is a noop copy,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +0000756 EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getOperand(0)->getType());
757 EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getType());
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +0000758
759 // This is an fp<->int conversion?
760 if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger())
761 return false;
762
763 // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which
764 // isn't a noop.
765 if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false;
766
767 // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted
768 // to. This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they
769 // are.
770 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) ==
771 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
772 SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT);
773 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) ==
774 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger)
775 DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT);
776
777 // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy.
778 if (SrcVT != DstVT)
779 return false;
780
781 return SinkCast(CI);
782}
783
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000784/// Try to combine CI into a call to the llvm.uadd.with.overflow intrinsic if
785/// possible.
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +0000786///
787/// Return true if any changes were made.
788static bool CombineUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *CI) {
789 Value *A, *B;
790 Instruction *AddI;
791 if (!match(CI,
792 m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_Instruction(AddI))))
793 return false;
794
795 Type *Ty = AddI->getType();
796 if (!isa<IntegerType>(Ty))
797 return false;
798
799 // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we we
800 // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic
801 // block containing the icmp:
802
803 if (AddI->getParent() != CI->getParent() && !AddI->hasOneUse())
804 return false;
805
806#ifndef NDEBUG
807 // Someday m_UAddWithOverflow may get smarter, but this is a safe assumption
808 // for now:
809 if (AddI->hasOneUse())
810 assert(*AddI->user_begin() == CI && "expected!");
811#endif
812
813 Module *M = CI->getParent()->getParent()->getParent();
814 Value *F = Intrinsic::getDeclaration(M, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow, Ty);
815
816 auto *InsertPt = AddI->hasOneUse() ? CI : AddI;
817
818 auto *UAddWithOverflow =
819 CallInst::Create(F, {A, B}, "uadd.overflow", InsertPt);
820 auto *UAdd = ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 0, "uadd", InsertPt);
821 auto *Overflow =
822 ExtractValueInst::Create(UAddWithOverflow, 1, "overflow", InsertPt);
823
824 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(Overflow);
825 AddI->replaceAllUsesWith(UAdd);
826 CI->eraseFromParent();
827 AddI->eraseFromParent();
828 return true;
829}
830
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000831/// Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual
832/// registers that must be created and coalesced. This is a clear win except on
833/// targets with multiple condition code registers (PowerPC), where it might
834/// lose; some adjustment may be wanted there.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000835///
836/// Return true if any changes are made.
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +0000837static bool SinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000838 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000839
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000840 /// Only insert a cmp in each block once.
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000841 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000842
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000843 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +0000844 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end();
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000845 UI != E; ) {
846 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
847 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000848
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000849 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
850 ++UI;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000851
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000852 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
853 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
854 continue;
855
856 // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in.
857 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000858
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000859 // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp.
860 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000861
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000862 // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it.
863 CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB];
864
865 if (!InsertedCmp) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +0000866 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000867 InsertedCmp =
Dan Gohmanad1f0a12009-08-25 23:17:54 +0000868 CmpInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(),
Owen Anderson1e5f00e2009-07-09 23:48:35 +0000869 CI->getPredicate(), CI->getOperand(0),
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000870 CI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt);
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000871 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000872
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000873 // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp.
874 TheUse = InsertedCmp;
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000875 MadeChange = true;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +0000876 ++NumCmpUses;
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000877 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000878
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000879 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp.
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000880 if (CI->use_empty()) {
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000881 CI->eraseFromParent();
Benjamin Kramerb4bf14c2015-04-10 22:25:36 +0000882 MadeChange = true;
883 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +0000884
Dale Johannesenedfec0b2007-06-12 16:50:17 +0000885 return MadeChange;
886}
887
Sanjoy Dasb6c59142015-04-10 21:07:09 +0000888static bool OptimizeCmpExpression(CmpInst *CI) {
889 if (SinkCmpExpression(CI))
890 return true;
891
892 if (CombineUAddWithOverflow(CI))
893 return true;
894
895 return false;
896}
897
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000898/// Check if the candidates could be combined with a shift instruction, which
899/// includes:
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000900/// 1. Truncate instruction
901/// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits:
902/// imm & (imm+1) == 0
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +0000903static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000904 if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) {
905 if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And ||
906 !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)))
907 return false;
908
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +0000909 const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue();
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000910
Quentin Colombetd4f44692014-04-22 01:20:34 +0000911 if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue())
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000912 return false;
913 }
914 return true;
915}
916
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000917/// Sink both shift and truncate instruction to the use of truncate's BB.
Benjamin Kramer322053c2014-04-27 14:54:59 +0000918static bool
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000919SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI,
920 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +0000921 const TargetLowering &TLI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000922 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
923 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs;
924 TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User);
925 bool MadeChange = false;
926
927 for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(),
928 TruncE = TruncI->user_end();
929 TruncUI != TruncE;) {
930
931 Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse();
932 Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI);
933 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
934
935 ++TruncUI;
936
937 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode());
938 if (!ISDOpcode)
939 continue;
940
Tim Northovere2239ff2014-07-29 10:20:22 +0000941 // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an
942 // implicit truncate.
943 // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an
944 // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the
945 // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though.
Ahmed Bougacha0788d492014-11-12 22:16:55 +0000946 if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +0000947 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, TruncUser->getType(), true)))
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000948 continue;
949
950 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
951 if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser))
952 continue;
953
954 BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent();
955
956 if (UserBB == TruncUserBB)
957 continue;
958
959 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB];
960 CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB];
961
962 if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) {
963 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
964 // Sink the shift
965 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
966 InsertedShift =
967 BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
968 else
969 InsertedShift =
970 BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
971
972 // Sink the trunc
973 BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
974 TruncInsertPt++;
975
976 InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift,
977 TruncI->getType(), "", TruncInsertPt);
978
979 MadeChange = true;
980
981 TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc;
982 }
983 }
984 return MadeChange;
985}
986
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +0000987/// Sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if the uses could
988/// potentially be combined with this shift instruction and generate BitExtract
989/// instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture supports BitExtract
990/// instruction. Here is an example:
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +0000991/// BB1:
992/// %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
993/// BB2:
994/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16
995/// ==>
996///
997/// BB2:
998/// %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32
999/// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16
1000///
1001/// CodeGen will recoginze the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract
1002/// instruction.
1003/// Return true if any changes are made.
1004static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI,
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001005 const TargetLowering &TLI,
1006 const DataLayout &DL) {
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001007 BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent();
1008
1009 /// Only insert instructions in each block once.
1010 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts;
1011
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001012 bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, ShiftI->getType()));
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001013
1014 bool MadeChange = false;
1015 for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end();
1016 UI != E;) {
1017 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse();
1018 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI);
1019 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it.
1020 ++UI;
1021
1022 // Don't bother for PHI nodes.
1023 if (isa<PHINode>(User))
1024 continue;
1025
1026 if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User))
1027 continue;
1028
1029 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
1030
1031 if (UserBB == DefBB) {
1032 // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of
1033 // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not
1034 // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate
1035 // instruction to the BB of TruncUse.
1036 // for example:
1037 // BB1:
1038 // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm
1039 // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16
1040 //
1041 // BB2:
1042 // ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does
1043 // not have i16 compare.
1044 // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2
1045 //
1046 if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal
1047 // If the type of the truncate is legal, no trucate will be
1048 // introduced in other basic blocks.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001049 &&
1050 (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, User->getType()))))
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001051 MadeChange =
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00001052 SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI, DL);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00001053
1054 continue;
1055 }
1056 // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it.
1057 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB];
1058
1059 if (!InsertedShift) {
1060 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1061
1062 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr)
1063 InsertedShift =
1064 BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
1065 else
1066 InsertedShift =
1067 BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, "", InsertPt);
1068
1069 MadeChange = true;
1070 }
1071
1072 // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift.
1073 TheUse = InsertedShift;
1074 }
1075
1076 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift.
1077 if (ShiftI->use_empty())
1078 ShiftI->eraseFromParent();
1079
1080 return MadeChange;
1081}
1082
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001083// Translate a masked load intrinsic like
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001084// <16 x i32 > @llvm.masked.load( <16 x i32>* %addr, i32 align,
1085// <16 x i1> %mask, <16 x i32> %passthru)
Benjamin Kramerdf005cb2015-08-08 18:27:36 +00001086// to a chain of basic blocks, with loading element one-by-one if
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001087// the appropriate mask bit is set
1088//
1089// %1 = bitcast i8* %addr to i32*
1090// %2 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 0
1091// %3 = icmp eq i1 %2, true
1092// br i1 %3, label %cond.load, label %else
1093//
1094//cond.load: ; preds = %0
1095// %4 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1096// %5 = load i32* %4
1097// %6 = insertelement <16 x i32> undef, i32 %5, i32 0
1098// br label %else
1099//
1100//else: ; preds = %0, %cond.load
1101// %res.phi.else = phi <16 x i32> [ %6, %cond.load ], [ undef, %0 ]
1102// %7 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 1
1103// %8 = icmp eq i1 %7, true
1104// br i1 %8, label %cond.load1, label %else2
1105//
1106//cond.load1: ; preds = %else
1107// %9 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 1
1108// %10 = load i32* %9
1109// %11 = insertelement <16 x i32> %res.phi.else, i32 %10, i32 1
1110// br label %else2
1111//
1112//else2: ; preds = %else, %cond.load1
1113// %res.phi.else3 = phi <16 x i32> [ %11, %cond.load1 ], [ %res.phi.else, %else ]
1114// %12 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 2
1115// %13 = icmp eq i1 %12, true
1116// br i1 %13, label %cond.load4, label %else5
1117//
1118static void ScalarizeMaskedLoad(CallInst *CI) {
1119 Value *Ptr = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1120 Value *Src0 = CI->getArgOperand(3);
1121 Value *Mask = CI->getArgOperand(2);
1122 VectorType *VecType = dyn_cast<VectorType>(CI->getType());
1123 Type *EltTy = VecType->getElementType();
1124
1125 assert(VecType && "Unexpected return type of masked load intrinsic");
1126
1127 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1128 Instruction *InsertPt = CI;
1129 BasicBlock *IfBlock = CI->getParent();
1130 BasicBlock *CondBlock = nullptr;
1131 BasicBlock *PrevIfBlock = CI->getParent();
1132 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1133
1134 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CI->getDebugLoc());
1135
1136 // Bitcast %addr fron i8* to EltTy*
1137 Type *NewPtrType =
1138 EltTy->getPointerTo(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType())->getAddressSpace());
1139 Value *FirstEltPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(Ptr, NewPtrType);
1140 Value *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(VecType);
1141
1142 // The result vector
1143 Value *VResult = UndefVal;
1144
1145 PHINode *Phi = nullptr;
1146 Value *PrevPhi = UndefVal;
1147
1148 unsigned VectorWidth = VecType->getNumElements();
1149 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx < VectorWidth; ++Idx) {
1150
1151 // Fill the "else" block, created in the previous iteration
1152 //
1153 // %res.phi.else3 = phi <16 x i32> [ %11, %cond.load1 ], [ %res.phi.else, %else ]
1154 // %mask_1 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 Idx
1155 // %to_load = icmp eq i1 %mask_1, true
1156 // br i1 %to_load, label %cond.load, label %else
1157 //
1158 if (Idx > 0) {
1159 Phi = Builder.CreatePHI(VecType, 2, "res.phi.else");
1160 Phi->addIncoming(VResult, CondBlock);
1161 Phi->addIncoming(PrevPhi, PrevIfBlock);
1162 PrevPhi = Phi;
1163 VResult = Phi;
1164 }
1165
1166 Value *Predicate = Builder.CreateExtractElement(Mask, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
1167 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ, Predicate,
1168 ConstantInt::get(Predicate->getType(), 1));
1169
1170 // Create "cond" block
1171 //
1172 // %EltAddr = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1173 // %Elt = load i32* %EltAddr
1174 // VResult = insertelement <16 x i32> VResult, i32 %Elt, i32 Idx
1175 //
1176 CondBlock = IfBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "cond.load");
1177 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00001178
1179 Value *Gep =
1180 Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(EltTy, FirstEltPtr, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001181 LoadInst* Load = Builder.CreateLoad(Gep, false);
1182 VResult = Builder.CreateInsertElement(VResult, Load, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
1183
1184 // Create "else" block, fill it in the next iteration
1185 BasicBlock *NewIfBlock = CondBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "else");
1186 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1187 Instruction *OldBr = IfBlock->getTerminator();
1188 BranchInst::Create(CondBlock, NewIfBlock, Cmp, OldBr);
1189 OldBr->eraseFromParent();
1190 PrevIfBlock = IfBlock;
1191 IfBlock = NewIfBlock;
1192 }
1193
1194 Phi = Builder.CreatePHI(VecType, 2, "res.phi.select");
1195 Phi->addIncoming(VResult, CondBlock);
1196 Phi->addIncoming(PrevPhi, PrevIfBlock);
1197 Value *NewI = Builder.CreateSelect(Mask, Phi, Src0);
1198 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(NewI);
1199 CI->eraseFromParent();
1200}
1201
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001202// Translate a masked store intrinsic, like
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001203// void @llvm.masked.store(<16 x i32> %src, <16 x i32>* %addr, i32 align,
1204// <16 x i1> %mask)
1205// to a chain of basic blocks, that stores element one-by-one if
1206// the appropriate mask bit is set
1207//
1208// %1 = bitcast i8* %addr to i32*
1209// %2 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 0
1210// %3 = icmp eq i1 %2, true
1211// br i1 %3, label %cond.store, label %else
1212//
1213// cond.store: ; preds = %0
1214// %4 = extractelement <16 x i32> %val, i32 0
1215// %5 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1216// store i32 %4, i32* %5
1217// br label %else
1218//
1219// else: ; preds = %0, %cond.store
1220// %6 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 1
1221// %7 = icmp eq i1 %6, true
1222// br i1 %7, label %cond.store1, label %else2
1223//
1224// cond.store1: ; preds = %else
1225// %8 = extractelement <16 x i32> %val, i32 1
1226// %9 = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 1
1227// store i32 %8, i32* %9
1228// br label %else2
1229// . . .
1230static void ScalarizeMaskedStore(CallInst *CI) {
1231 Value *Ptr = CI->getArgOperand(1);
1232 Value *Src = CI->getArgOperand(0);
1233 Value *Mask = CI->getArgOperand(3);
1234
1235 VectorType *VecType = dyn_cast<VectorType>(Src->getType());
1236 Type *EltTy = VecType->getElementType();
1237
1238 assert(VecType && "Unexpected data type in masked store intrinsic");
1239
1240 IRBuilder<> Builder(CI->getContext());
1241 Instruction *InsertPt = CI;
1242 BasicBlock *IfBlock = CI->getParent();
1243 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1244 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CI->getDebugLoc());
1245
1246 // Bitcast %addr fron i8* to EltTy*
1247 Type *NewPtrType =
1248 EltTy->getPointerTo(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType())->getAddressSpace());
1249 Value *FirstEltPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(Ptr, NewPtrType);
1250
1251 unsigned VectorWidth = VecType->getNumElements();
1252 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx < VectorWidth; ++Idx) {
1253
1254 // Fill the "else" block, created in the previous iteration
1255 //
1256 // %mask_1 = extractelement <16 x i1> %mask, i32 Idx
1257 // %to_store = icmp eq i1 %mask_1, true
1258 // br i1 %to_load, label %cond.store, label %else
1259 //
1260 Value *Predicate = Builder.CreateExtractElement(Mask, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
1261 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmp(ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ, Predicate,
1262 ConstantInt::get(Predicate->getType(), 1));
1263
1264 // Create "cond" block
1265 //
1266 // %OneElt = extractelement <16 x i32> %Src, i32 Idx
1267 // %EltAddr = getelementptr i32* %1, i32 0
1268 // %store i32 %OneElt, i32* %EltAddr
1269 //
1270 BasicBlock *CondBlock = IfBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "cond.store");
1271 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1272
1273 Value *OneElt = Builder.CreateExtractElement(Src, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
David Blaikieaa41cd52015-04-03 21:33:42 +00001274 Value *Gep =
1275 Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(EltTy, FirstEltPtr, Builder.getInt32(Idx));
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001276 Builder.CreateStore(OneElt, Gep);
1277
1278 // Create "else" block, fill it in the next iteration
1279 BasicBlock *NewIfBlock = CondBlock->splitBasicBlock(InsertPt, "else");
1280 Builder.SetInsertPoint(InsertPt);
1281 Instruction *OldBr = IfBlock->getTerminator();
1282 BranchInst::Create(CondBlock, NewIfBlock, Cmp, OldBr);
1283 OldBr->eraseFromParent();
1284 IfBlock = NewIfBlock;
1285 }
1286 CI->eraseFromParent();
1287}
1288
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00001289bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00001290 BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001291
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00001292 // Lower inline assembly if we can.
1293 // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to
1294 // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now.
1295 if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) {
1296 if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) {
1297 // Avoid invalidating the iterator.
1298 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
1299 // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause
1300 // reuse before a value is defined.
1301 SunkAddrs.clear();
1302 return true;
1303 }
1304 // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00001305 if (optimizeInlineAsmInst(CI))
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00001306 return true;
1307 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001308
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001309 // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good
1310 // idea
1311 unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00001312 if (TLI && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) {
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001313 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) {
1314 // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and
1315 // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes
1316 // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and
1317 // if size - offset meets the size threshold.
1318 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy())
1319 continue;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00001320 APInt Offset(DL->getPointerSizeInBits(
1321 cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()),
1322 0);
1323 Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*DL, Offset);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001324 uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue();
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00001325 if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0)
1326 continue;
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001327 AllocaInst *AI;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00001328 if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) && AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign &&
1329 DL->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2)
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001330 AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00001331 // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this
1332 // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and
1333 // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is
1334 // forbidden.
1335 GlobalVariable *GV;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00001336 if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) && GV->hasUniqueInitializer() &&
1337 !GV->hasSection() && GV->getAlignment() < PrefAlign &&
1338 DL->getTypeAllocSize(GV->getType()->getElementType()) >=
1339 MinSize + Offset2)
John Brawne8fd6c82015-04-13 10:47:39 +00001340 GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001341 }
1342 // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the
1343 // alignment
1344 if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00001345 unsigned Align = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *DL);
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001346 if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI))
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00001347 Align = std::min(Align, getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *DL));
John Brawn0dbcd652015-03-18 12:01:59 +00001348 if (Align > MI->getAlignment())
1349 MI->setAlignment(ConstantInt::get(MI->getAlignmentType(), Align));
1350 }
1351 }
1352
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001353 IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001354 if (II) {
1355 switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) {
1356 default: break;
1357 case Intrinsic::objectsize: {
1358 // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.*
1359 bool Min = (cast<ConstantInt>(II->getArgOperand(1))->getZExtValue() == 1);
1360 Type *ReturnTy = CI->getType();
1361 Constant *RetVal = ConstantInt::get(ReturnTy, Min ? 0 : -1ULL);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001362
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001363 // Substituting this can cause recursive simplifications, which can
1364 // invalidate our iterator. Use a WeakVH to hold onto it in case this
1365 // happens.
1366 WeakVH IterHandle(CurInstIterator);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00001367
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001368 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal,
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +00001369 TLInfo, nullptr);
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00001370
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001371 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
1372 // start of the block.
1373 if (IterHandle != CurInstIterator) {
1374 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
1375 SunkAddrs.clear();
1376 }
1377 return true;
Chris Lattner86d56c62011-01-18 20:53:04 +00001378 }
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001379 case Intrinsic::masked_load: {
1380 // Scalarize unsupported vector masked load
1381 if (!TTI->isLegalMaskedLoad(CI->getType(), 1)) {
1382 ScalarizeMaskedLoad(CI);
1383 ModifiedDT = true;
1384 return true;
1385 }
1386 return false;
1387 }
1388 case Intrinsic::masked_store: {
1389 if (!TTI->isLegalMaskedStore(CI->getArgOperand(0)->getType(), 1)) {
1390 ScalarizeMaskedStore(CI);
1391 ModifiedDT = true;
1392 return true;
1393 }
1394 return false;
1395 }
Ahmed Bougacha236f9042015-05-22 21:37:17 +00001396 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stlxr:
1397 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stxr: {
1398 ZExtInst *ExtVal = dyn_cast<ZExtInst>(CI->getArgOperand(0));
1399 if (!ExtVal || !ExtVal->hasOneUse() ||
1400 ExtVal->getParent() == CI->getParent())
1401 return false;
1402 // Sink a zext feeding stlxr/stxr before it, so it can be folded into it.
1403 ExtVal->moveBefore(CI);
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00001404 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other
1405 // optimizations don't touch it.
1406 InsertedInsts.insert(ExtVal);
Ahmed Bougacha236f9042015-05-22 21:37:17 +00001407 return true;
1408 }
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +00001409 case Intrinsic::invariant_group_barrier:
1410 II->replaceAllUsesWith(II->getArgOperand(0));
1411 II->eraseFromParent();
1412 return true;
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001413 }
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001414
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001415 if (TLI) {
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00001416 // Unknown address space.
1417 // TODO: Target hook to pick which address space the intrinsic cares
1418 // about?
1419 unsigned AddrSpace = ~0u;
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001420 SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps;
1421 Type *AccessTy;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00001422 if (TLI->GetAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001423 while (!PtrOps.empty())
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00001424 if (optimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrOps.pop_back_val(), AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00001425 return true;
1426 }
Pete Cooper615fd892012-03-13 20:59:56 +00001427 }
1428
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001429 // From here on out we're working with named functions.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001430 if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false;
Devang Patel0da52502011-05-26 21:51:06 +00001431
Benjamin Kramer7b88a492010-03-12 09:27:41 +00001432 // Lower all default uses of _chk calls. This is very similar
1433 // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00001434 // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default
1435 // "don't know" as the objectsize. Anything else should be left alone.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001436 FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true);
Ahmed Bougachae03bef72015-01-12 17:22:43 +00001437 if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) {
1438 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
1439 CI->eraseFromParent();
1440 return true;
1441 }
1442 return false;
Eric Christopher4b7948e2010-03-11 02:41:03 +00001443}
Chris Lattner1b93be52011-01-15 07:25:29 +00001444
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001445/// Look for opportunities to duplicate return instructions to the predecessor
1446/// to enable tail call optimizations. The case it is currently looking for is:
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001447/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001448/// bb0:
1449/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
1450/// br label %return
1451/// bb1:
1452/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
1453/// br label %return
1454/// bb2:
1455/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
1456/// br label %return
1457/// return:
1458/// %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ]
1459/// ret i32 %retval
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001460/// @endcode
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001461///
1462/// =>
1463///
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001464/// @code
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001465/// bb0:
1466/// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0()
1467/// ret i32 %tmp0
1468/// bb1:
1469/// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1()
1470/// ret i32 %tmp1
1471/// bb2:
1472/// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2()
1473/// ret i32 %tmp2
Dmitri Gribenko2bc1d482012-09-13 12:34:29 +00001474/// @endcode
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00001475bool CodeGenPrepare::dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB) {
Cameron Zwarich47e71752011-03-24 04:51:51 +00001476 if (!TLI)
1477 return false;
1478
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00001479 ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator());
1480 if (!RI)
1481 return false;
1482
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001483 PHINode *PN = nullptr;
1484 BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001485 Value *V = RI->getReturnValue();
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00001486 if (V) {
1487 BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V);
1488 if (BCI)
1489 V = BCI->getOperand(0);
1490
1491 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V);
1492 if (!PN)
1493 return false;
1494 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001495
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001496 if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB)
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001497 return false;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001498
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001499 // It's not safe to eliminate the sign / zero extension of the return value.
1500 // See llvm::isInTailCallPosition().
1501 const Function *F = BB->getParent();
Bill Wendling658d24d2013-01-18 21:53:16 +00001502 AttributeSet CallerAttrs = F->getAttributes();
1503 if (CallerAttrs.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::ReturnIndex, Attribute::ZExt) ||
1504 CallerAttrs.hasAttribute(AttributeSet::ReturnIndex, Attribute::SExt))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001505 return false;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001506
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001507 // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the
1508 // return is the first instruction in the block.
1509 if (PN) {
1510 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
1511 do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI));
Evan Cheng249716e2012-07-27 21:21:26 +00001512 if (&*BI == BCI)
1513 // Also skip over the bitcast.
1514 ++BI;
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001515 if (&*BI != RI)
1516 return false;
1517 } else {
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00001518 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin();
1519 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI;
1520 if (&*BI != RI)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001521 return false;
1522 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001523
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001524 /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail
1525 /// call.
1526 SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls;
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001527 if (PN) {
1528 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) {
1529 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I));
1530 // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call.
1531 if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) &&
1532 TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI))
1533 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
1534 }
1535 } else {
1536 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001537 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) {
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00001538 if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001539 continue;
1540
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001541 BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList();
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001542 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin();
1543 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend();
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00001544 do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI));
1545 if (RI == RE)
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001546 continue;
Cameron Zwarich74157ab2011-03-24 16:34:59 +00001547
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001548 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI);
Cameron Zwarich2edfe772011-03-24 15:54:11 +00001549 if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI))
Cameron Zwarich4649f172011-03-24 04:52:10 +00001550 TailCalls.push_back(CI);
1551 }
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001552 }
1553
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001554 bool Changed = false;
1555 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) {
1556 CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i];
1557 CallSite CS(CI);
1558
1559 // Conservatively require the attributes of the call to match those of the
1560 // return. Ignore noalias because it doesn't affect the call sequence.
Bill Wendling658d24d2013-01-18 21:53:16 +00001561 AttributeSet CalleeAttrs = CS.getAttributes();
1562 if (AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeSet::ReturnIndex).
Bill Wendling3d7b0b82012-12-19 07:18:57 +00001563 removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias) !=
Bill Wendling658d24d2013-01-18 21:53:16 +00001564 AttrBuilder(CalleeAttrs, AttributeSet::ReturnIndex).
Bill Wendling3d7b0b82012-12-19 07:18:57 +00001565 removeAttribute(Attribute::NoAlias))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001566 continue;
1567
1568 // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to
1569 // the return block.
1570 BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent();
1571 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator());
1572 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
1573 continue;
1574
1575 // Duplicate the return into CallBB.
1576 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, CallBB);
Devang Patel8f606d72011-03-24 15:35:25 +00001577 ModifiedDT = Changed = true;
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001578 ++NumRetsDup;
1579 }
1580
1581 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Evan Cheng64a223a2012-09-28 23:58:57 +00001582 if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
Cameron Zwarich0e331c02011-03-24 04:52:07 +00001583 BB->eraseFromParent();
1584
1585 return Changed;
Evan Cheng0663f232011-03-21 01:19:09 +00001586}
1587
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00001588//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00001589// Memory Optimization
1590//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
1591
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001592namespace {
1593
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00001594/// This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001595/// which holds actual Value*'s for register values.
Chandler Carruth95f83e02013-01-07 15:14:13 +00001596struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001597 Value *BaseReg;
1598 Value *ScaledReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001599 ExtAddrMode() : BaseReg(nullptr), ScaledReg(nullptr) {}
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001600 void print(raw_ostream &OS) const;
1601 void dump() const;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00001602
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001603 bool operator==(const ExtAddrMode& O) const {
1604 return (BaseReg == O.BaseReg) && (ScaledReg == O.ScaledReg) &&
1605 (BaseGV == O.BaseGV) && (BaseOffs == O.BaseOffs) &&
1606 (HasBaseReg == O.HasBaseReg) && (Scale == O.Scale);
1607 }
1608};
1609
Eli Friedmanc1f1f852013-09-10 23:09:24 +00001610#ifndef NDEBUG
1611static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) {
1612 AM.print(OS);
1613 return OS;
1614}
1615#endif
1616
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001617void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const {
1618 bool NeedPlus = false;
1619 OS << "[";
1620 if (BaseGV) {
1621 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1622 << "GV:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00001623 BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001624 NeedPlus = true;
1625 }
1626
Richard Trieuc0f91212014-05-30 03:15:17 +00001627 if (BaseOffs) {
1628 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1629 << BaseOffs;
1630 NeedPlus = true;
1631 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001632
1633 if (BaseReg) {
1634 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1635 << "Base:";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00001636 BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001637 NeedPlus = true;
1638 }
1639 if (Scale) {
1640 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "")
1641 << Scale << "*";
Chandler Carruthd48cdbf2014-01-09 02:29:41 +00001642 ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00001643 }
1644
1645 OS << ']';
1646}
1647
1648#if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP)
1649void ExtAddrMode::dump() const {
1650 print(dbgs());
1651 dbgs() << '\n';
1652}
1653#endif
1654
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001655/// \brief This class provides transaction based operation on the IR.
1656/// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and
1657/// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called.
1658class TypePromotionTransaction {
1659
1660 /// \brief This represents the common interface of the individual transaction.
1661 /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on
1662 /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction.
1663 class TypePromotionAction {
1664 protected:
1665 /// The Instruction modified.
1666 Instruction *Inst;
1667
1668 public:
1669 /// \brief Constructor of the action.
1670 /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR.
1671 TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {}
1672
1673 virtual ~TypePromotionAction() {}
1674
1675 /// \brief Undo the modification done by this action.
1676 /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was
1677 /// before this action was applied.
1678 /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same
1679 /// state as it was directly after this action was applied.
1680 virtual void undo() = 0;
1681
1682 /// \brief Advocate every change made by this action.
1683 /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important
1684 /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever.
1685 virtual void commit() {
1686 // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything.
1687 }
1688 };
1689
1690 /// \brief Utility to remember the position of an instruction.
1691 class InsertionHandler {
1692 /// Position of an instruction.
1693 /// Either an instruction:
1694 /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used.
1695 /// - Has a previous instructon: PrevInst is used.
1696 union {
1697 Instruction *PrevInst;
1698 BasicBlock *BB;
1699 } Point;
1700 /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction.
1701 bool HasPrevInstruction;
1702
1703 public:
1704 /// \brief Record the position of \p Inst.
1705 InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) {
1706 BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst;
1707 HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin()));
1708 if (HasPrevInstruction)
1709 Point.PrevInst = --It;
1710 else
1711 Point.BB = Inst->getParent();
1712 }
1713
1714 /// \brief Insert \p Inst at the recorded position.
1715 void insert(Instruction *Inst) {
1716 if (HasPrevInstruction) {
1717 if (Inst->getParent())
1718 Inst->removeFromParent();
1719 Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst);
1720 } else {
1721 Instruction *Position = Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt();
1722 if (Inst->getParent())
1723 Inst->moveBefore(Position);
1724 else
1725 Inst->insertBefore(Position);
1726 }
1727 }
1728 };
1729
1730 /// \brief Move an instruction before another.
1731 class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction {
1732 /// Original position of the instruction.
1733 InsertionHandler Position;
1734
1735 public:
1736 /// \brief Move \p Inst before \p Before.
1737 InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before)
1738 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) {
1739 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before << "\n");
1740 Inst->moveBefore(Before);
1741 }
1742
1743 /// \brief Move the instruction back to its original position.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001744 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001745 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n");
1746 Position.insert(Inst);
1747 }
1748 };
1749
1750 /// \brief Set the operand of an instruction with a new value.
1751 class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction {
1752 /// Original operand of the instruction.
1753 Value *Origin;
1754 /// Index of the modified instruction.
1755 unsigned Idx;
1756
1757 public:
1758 /// \brief Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal.
1759 OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal)
1760 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) {
1761 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n"
1762 << "for:" << *Inst << "\n"
1763 << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n");
1764 Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx);
1765 Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal);
1766 }
1767
1768 /// \brief Restore the original value of the instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001769 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001770 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n"
1771 << "for: " << *Inst << "\n"
1772 << "with: " << *Origin << "\n");
1773 Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin);
1774 }
1775 };
1776
1777 /// \brief Hide the operands of an instruction.
1778 /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands.
1779 class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction {
1780 /// The list of original operands.
1781 SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues;
1782
1783 public:
1784 /// \brief Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst.
1785 OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
1786 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
1787 unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands();
1788 OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds);
1789 for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) {
1790 // Save the current operand.
1791 Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It);
1792 OriginalValues.push_back(Val);
1793 // Set a dummy one.
1794 // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would implied an overhead
1795 // that we are not willing to pay.
1796 Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType()));
1797 }
1798 }
1799
1800 /// \brief Restore the original list of uses.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001801 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001802 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n");
1803 for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It)
1804 Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]);
1805 }
1806 };
1807
1808 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction.
1809 class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001810 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001811 public:
1812 /// \brief Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
1813 /// result.
1814 /// trunc Opnd to Ty.
1815 TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) {
1816 IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001817 Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
1818 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001819 }
1820
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001821 /// \brief Get the built value.
1822 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001823
1824 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001825 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001826 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
1827 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
1828 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001829 }
1830 };
1831
1832 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction.
1833 class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001834 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001835 public:
1836 /// \brief Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
1837 /// result.
1838 /// sext Opnd to Ty.
1839 SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001840 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001841 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001842 Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
1843 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001844 }
1845
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001846 /// \brief Get the built value.
1847 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001848
1849 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001850 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001851 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
1852 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
1853 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001854 }
1855 };
1856
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001857 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction.
1858 class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001859 Value *Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001860 public:
1861 /// \brief Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty
1862 /// result.
1863 /// zext Opnd to Ty.
1864 ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty)
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001865 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001866 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001867 Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted");
1868 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001869 }
1870
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001871 /// \brief Get the built value.
1872 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; }
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001873
1874 /// \brief Remove the built instruction.
1875 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00001876 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n");
1877 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val))
1878 IVal->eraseFromParent();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00001879 }
1880 };
1881
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001882 /// \brief Mutate an instruction to another type.
1883 class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction {
1884 /// Record the original type.
1885 Type *OrigTy;
1886
1887 public:
1888 /// \brief Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy.
1889 TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy)
1890 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) {
1891 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy
1892 << "\n");
1893 Inst->mutateType(NewTy);
1894 }
1895
1896 /// \brief Mutate the instruction back to its original type.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001897 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001898 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy
1899 << "\n");
1900 Inst->mutateType(OrigTy);
1901 }
1902 };
1903
1904 /// \brief Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction.
1905 class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction {
1906 /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses.
1907 struct InstructionAndIdx {
1908 /// The instruction using the instruction.
1909 Instruction *Inst;
1910 /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst.
1911 unsigned Idx;
1912 InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx)
1913 : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {}
1914 };
1915
1916 /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index).
1917 SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses;
1918 typedef SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator use_iterator;
1919
1920 public:
1921 /// \brief Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New.
1922 UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) {
1923 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New
1924 << "\n");
1925 // Record the original uses.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001926 for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) {
1927 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
1928 OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001929 }
1930 // Now, we can replace the uses.
1931 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New);
1932 }
1933
1934 /// \brief Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001935 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001936 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n");
1937 for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(),
1938 EndIt = OriginalUses.end();
1939 UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) {
1940 UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst);
1941 }
1942 }
1943 };
1944
1945 /// \brief Remove an instruction from the IR.
1946 class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction {
1947 /// Original position of the instruction.
1948 InsertionHandler Inserter;
1949 /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other
1950 /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed.
1951 OperandsHider Hider;
1952 /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any.
1953 UsesReplacer *Replacer;
1954
1955 public:
1956 /// \brief Remove all reference of \p Inst and optinally replace all its
1957 /// uses with New.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001958 /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr
1959 InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, Value *New = nullptr)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001960 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst),
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00001961 Replacer(nullptr) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001962 if (New)
1963 Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New);
1964 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
1965 Inst->removeFromParent();
1966 }
1967
Alexander Kornienkof817c1c2015-04-11 02:11:45 +00001968 ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001969
1970 /// \brief Really remove the instruction.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001971 void commit() override { delete Inst; }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001972
1973 /// \brief Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if
1974 /// new value was provided when build this action.
Craig Topper4584cd52014-03-07 09:26:03 +00001975 void undo() override {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00001976 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n");
1977 Inserter.insert(Inst);
1978 if (Replacer)
1979 Replacer->undo();
1980 Hider.undo();
1981 }
1982 };
1983
1984public:
1985 /// Restoration point.
1986 /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator
1987 /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer.
1988 typedef const TypePromotionAction *ConstRestorationPt;
1989 /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction.
1990 void commit();
1991 /// Undo all the changes made after the given point.
1992 void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point);
1993 /// Get the current restoration point.
1994 ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const;
1995
1996 /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback.
1997 /// @{
1998 /// Same as Instruction::setOperand.
1999 void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal);
2000 /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002001 void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002002 /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith.
2003 void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New);
2004 /// Same as Value::mutateType.
2005 void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy);
2006 /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002007 Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002008 /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002009 Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002010 /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002011 Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002012 /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore.
2013 void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before);
2014 /// @}
2015
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002016private:
2017 /// The ordered list of actions made so far.
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002018 SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions;
2019 typedef SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator CommitPt;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002020};
2021
2022void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx,
2023 Value *NewVal) {
2024 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002025 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>(Inst, Idx, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002026}
2027
2028void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst,
2029 Value *NewVal) {
2030 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002031 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>(Inst, NewVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002032}
2033
2034void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst,
2035 Value *New) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002036 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002037}
2038
2039void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002040 Actions.push_back(make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002041}
2042
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002043Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd,
2044 Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002045 std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002046 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002047 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002048 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002049}
2050
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002051Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst,
2052 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002053 std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002054 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002055 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002056 return Val;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002057}
2058
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002059Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst,
2060 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) {
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002061 std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002062 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue();
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002063 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002064 return Val;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002065}
2066
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002067void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst,
2068 Instruction *Before) {
2069 Actions.push_back(
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002070 make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>(Inst, Before));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002071}
2072
2073TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt
2074TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002075 return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002076}
2077
2078void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() {
2079 for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt;
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002080 ++It)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002081 (*It)->commit();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002082 Actions.clear();
2083}
2084
2085void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback(
2086 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) {
David Blaikie7620b312014-04-15 06:17:44 +00002087 while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) {
2088 std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002089 Curr->undo();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002090 }
2091}
2092
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002093/// \brief A helper class for matching addressing modes.
2094///
2095/// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes.
2096class AddressingModeMatcher {
2097 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts;
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002098 const TargetMachine &TM;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002099 const TargetLowering &TLI;
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002100 const DataLayout &DL;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002101
2102 /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and
2103 /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for.
2104 Type *AccessTy;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00002105 unsigned AddrSpace;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002106 Instruction *MemoryInst;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002107
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002108 /// This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002109 /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff.
2110 ExtAddrMode &AddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002111
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002112 /// The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations.
2113 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002114 /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion.
2115 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts;
2116 /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
2117 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT;
2118
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002119 /// This is set to true when we should not do profitability checks.
2120 /// When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode always returns true.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002121 bool IgnoreProfitability;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002122
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002123 AddressingModeMatcher(SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00002124 const TargetMachine &TM, Type *AT, unsigned AS,
2125 Instruction *MI, ExtAddrMode &AM,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002126 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002127 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2128 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT)
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002129 : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TM(TM),
2130 TLI(*TM.getSubtargetImpl(*MI->getParent()->getParent())
2131 ->getTargetLowering()),
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002132 DL(MI->getModule()->getDataLayout()), AccessTy(AT), AddrSpace(AS),
2133 MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM), InsertedInsts(InsertedInsts),
2134 PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002135 IgnoreProfitability = false;
2136 }
2137public:
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002138
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002139 /// Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002140 /// give an access type of AccessTy. This returns a list of involved
2141 /// instructions in AddrModeInsts.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002142 /// \p InsertedInsts The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002143 /// optimizations.
2144 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
2145 /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered.
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00002146 static ExtAddrMode Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002147 Instruction *MemoryInst,
2148 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts,
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002149 const TargetMachine &TM,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002150 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002151 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2152 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002153 ExtAddrMode Result;
2154
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00002155 bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TM, AccessTy, AS,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002156 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts,
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002157 PromotedInsts, TPT).matchAddr(V, 0);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002158 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
2159 return Result;
2160 }
2161private:
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002162 bool matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth);
2163 bool matchAddr(Value *V, unsigned Depth);
2164 bool matchOperationAddr(User *Operation, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth,
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002165 bool *MovedAway = nullptr);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002166 bool isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002167 ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
2168 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002169 bool valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2);
2170 bool isPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost,
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002171 Value *PromotedOperand) const;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002172};
2173
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002174/// Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002175/// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target,
2176/// false if not.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002177bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002178 unsigned Depth) {
2179 // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing
2180 // mode. Just process that directly.
2181 if (Scale == 1)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002182 return matchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002183
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002184 // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this.
2185 if (Scale == 0)
2186 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002187
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002188 // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we
2189 // need an available scale field.
2190 if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg)
2191 return false;
2192
2193 ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode;
2194
2195 // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7. This could also do things like
2196 // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8].
2197 TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale;
2198 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg;
2199
2200 // If the new address isn't legal, bail out.
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00002201 if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002202 return false;
2203
2204 // It was legal, so commit it.
2205 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002206
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002207 // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode. Check now
2208 // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C. If so, we can turn this into adding
2209 // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002210 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002211 if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) && // not a constant expr.
2212 match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) {
2213 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS;
2214 TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002215
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002216 // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded
2217 // this instruction.
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00002218 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002219 AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg));
2220 AddrMode = TestAddrMode;
2221 return true;
2222 }
2223 }
2224
2225 // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have.
2226 return true;
2227}
2228
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002229/// This is a little filter, which returns true if an addressing computation
2230/// involving I might be folded into a load/store accessing it.
2231/// This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002232/// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can.
2233static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) {
2234 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
2235 case Instruction::BitCast:
Eli Benderskyf13a0562014-05-22 00:02:52 +00002236 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002237 // Don't touch identity bitcasts.
2238 if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType())
2239 return false;
2240 return I->getType()->isPointerTy() || I->getType()->isIntegerTy();
2241 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
2242 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
2243 return true;
2244 case Instruction::IntToPtr:
2245 // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable.
2246 return true;
2247 case Instruction::Add:
2248 return true;
2249 case Instruction::Mul:
2250 case Instruction::Shl:
2251 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
2252 return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1));
2253 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
2254 return true;
2255 default:
2256 return false;
2257 }
2258}
2259
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002260/// \brief Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI.
2261/// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion.
2262/// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed
2263/// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00002264static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI,
2265 const DataLayout &DL, Value *Val) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002266 Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val);
2267 if (!PromotedInst)
2268 return false;
2269 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode());
2270 // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion.
2271 if (!ISDOpcode)
2272 return true;
2273 // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not.
2274 return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00002275 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, PromotedInst->getType()));
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002276}
2277
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002278/// \brief Hepler class to perform type promotion.
2279class TypePromotionHelper {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002280 /// \brief Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension
2281 /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by
2282 /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst.
2283 /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002284 /// In other words, check if:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002285 /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002286 /// #1 Promotion applies:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002287 /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...).
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002288 /// #2 Operand reuses:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002289 /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002290 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002291 static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType,
2292 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002293
2294 /// \brief Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when
2295 /// promoting \p Inst.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002296 static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002297 if (isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0)
2298 return false;
2299 return true;
2300 }
2301
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002302 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002303 /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002304 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002305 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002306 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002307 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
2308 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002309 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002310 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002311 static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
2312 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002313 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002314 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002315 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002316
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002317 /// \brief Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002318 /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext.
2319 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002320 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002321 /// created to promote the operand of Ext.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002322 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts.
2323 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002324 /// Should never be called directly.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002325 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002326 static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext,
2327 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2328 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2329 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
2330 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
2331 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
2332 const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002333
2334 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002335 static Value *signExtendOperandForOther(
2336 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2337 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
2338 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
2339 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
2340 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
2341 Exts, Truncs, TLI, true);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002342 }
2343
2344 /// \see promoteOperandForOther.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002345 static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther(
2346 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
2347 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
2348 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
2349 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
2350 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost,
2351 Exts, Truncs, TLI, false);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002352 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002353
2354public:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002355 /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext.
2356 typedef Value *(*Action)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002357 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2358 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002359 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002360 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs,
2361 const TargetLowering &TLI);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002362 /// \brief Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the approriate
2363 /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002364 /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current
2365 /// sign extension.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002366 /// \p InsertedInsts keeps track of all the instructions inserted by the
2367 /// other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002368 /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare
2369 /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove.
2370 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002371 static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002372 const TargetLowering &TLI,
2373 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts);
2374};
2375
2376bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst,
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002377 Type *ConsideredExtType,
2378 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts,
2379 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002380 // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet.
2381 // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we
2382 // statically extend, e.g., constants and such.
2383 if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy())
2384 return false;
2385
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002386 // We can always get through zext.
2387 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst))
2388 return true;
2389
2390 // sext(sext) is ok too.
2391 if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002392 return true;
2393
2394 // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the
2395 // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag.
2396 const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst);
2397 if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) &&
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002398 ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) ||
2399 (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap())))
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002400 return true;
2401
2402 // Check if we can do the following simplification.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002403 // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd)
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002404 if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst))
2405 return false;
2406
2407 Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002408 // Check if we can use this operand in the extension.
2409 // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002410 // we cannot.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002411 if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() ||
2412 OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
2413 ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth())
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002414 return false;
2415
2416 // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have
2417 // any information on the dropped bits.
2418 // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic).
2419 Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal);
2420 if (!Opnd)
2421 return false;
2422
2423 // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002424 // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of
2425 // the extension.
2426 // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002427 const Type *OpndType;
2428 InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd);
Benjamin Kramer4cd5faa2015-07-31 17:00:39 +00002429 if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.getInt() == IsSExt)
2430 OpndType = It->second.getPointer();
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002431 else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd)))
2432 OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002433 else
2434 return false;
2435
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002436 // #2 check that the truncate just drop extended bits.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002437 if (Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >= OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth())
2438 return true;
2439
2440 return false;
2441}
2442
2443TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction(
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002444 Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002445 const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002446 assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) &&
2447 "Unexpected instruction type");
2448 Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
2449 Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType();
2450 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext);
2451 // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002452 // get through.
2453 // If it, check we can get through.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002454 if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002455 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002456
2457 // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare.
2458 // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be
2459 // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop.
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002460 if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedInsts.count(ExtOpnd))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002461 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002462
2463 // SExt or Trunc instructions.
2464 // Return the related handler.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002465 if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) ||
2466 isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002467 return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002468
2469 // Regular instruction.
2470 // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002471 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType()))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002472 return nullptr;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002473 return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002474}
2475
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002476Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt(
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002477 llvm::Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002478 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002479 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002480 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002481 // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
2482 // get through it and this method should not be called.
2483 Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002484 Value *ExtVal = SExt;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002485 bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002486 if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002487 // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd))
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002488 // => zext(opnd).
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002489 HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002490 Value *ZExt =
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002491 TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType());
2492 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt);
2493 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002494 ExtVal = ZExt;
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002495 } else {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002496 // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd))
2497 // => z|sext(opnd).
Quentin Colombetb2c5c6d2014-09-11 21:22:14 +00002498 TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0));
2499 }
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002500 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002501
2502 // Remove dead code.
2503 if (SExtOpnd->use_empty())
2504 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd);
2505
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00002506 // Check if the extension is still needed.
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002507 Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002508 if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) {
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002509 if (ExtInst) {
2510 if (Exts)
2511 Exts->push_back(ExtInst);
2512 CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt;
2513 }
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002514 return ExtVal;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002515 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002516
Quentin Colombet9dcb7242014-09-15 18:26:58 +00002517 // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty.
2518 // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst.
2519 Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0);
2520 TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002521 return NextVal;
2522}
2523
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002524Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther(
2525 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002526 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002527 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002528 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI,
2529 bool IsSExt) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002530 // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002531 // get through it and this method should not be called.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002532 Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0));
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002533 CreatedInstsCost = 0;
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002534 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) {
2535 // ExtOpnd will be promoted.
2536 // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002537 // promoted version.
2538 // Create the truncate now.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002539 Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType());
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002540 if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) {
2541 ITrunc->removeFromParent();
2542 // Insert it just after the definition.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002543 ITrunc->insertAfter(ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002544 if (Truncs)
2545 Truncs->push_back(ITrunc);
Quentin Colombetac55b152014-09-16 22:36:07 +00002546 }
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002547
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002548 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc);
2549 // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replace by the previous call
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002550 // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002551 TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002552 }
2553
2554 // Get through the Instruction:
2555 // 1. Update its type.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002556 // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst.
2557 // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002558
2559 // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion.
2560 // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002561 PromotedInsts.insert(std::pair<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>(
2562 ExtOpnd, TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), IsSExt)));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002563 // Step #1.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002564 TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType());
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002565 // Step #2.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002566 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002567 // Step #3.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002568 Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002569
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002570 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n");
2571 for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002572 ++OpIdx) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002573 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n');
2574 if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() ||
2575 !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002576 DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n");
2577 continue;
2578 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002579 // Check if we can statically extend the operand.
2580 Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002581 if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002582 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
2583 unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
2584 APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth)
2585 : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth);
2586 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002587 continue;
2588 }
2589 // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them.
2590 if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) {
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002591 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n");
2592 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType()));
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002593 continue;
2594 }
2595
2596 // Otherwise we have to explicity sign extend the operand.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002597 // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand.
2598 if (!ExtForOpnd) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002599 // If yes, create a new one.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002600 DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n");
Quentin Colombet84f89cc2014-12-22 18:11:52 +00002601 Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType())
2602 : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType());
2603 if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) {
2604 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd);
2605 continue;
2606 }
2607 ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002608 }
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002609 if (Exts)
2610 Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002611 TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002612
2613 // Move the sign extension before the insertion point.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002614 TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd);
2615 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002616 CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002617 // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002618 ExtForOpnd = nullptr;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002619 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002620 if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) {
2621 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n");
2622 TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002623 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002624 return ExtOpnd;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002625}
2626
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002627/// Check whether or not promoting an instruction to a wider type is profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002628/// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the
2629/// promotion.
2630/// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion
2631/// plus the number of instructions that have been
2632/// matched in the addressing mode the promotion.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002633/// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted.
2634/// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002635bool AddressingModeMatcher::isPromotionProfitable(
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002636 unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const {
2637 DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost << '\n');
2638 // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the
2639 // old extension plus what we folded.
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002640 // This is not profitable.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002641 if (NewCost > OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002642 return false;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002643 if (NewCost < OldCost)
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002644 return true;
2645 // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in
2646 // loads for instance.
2647 // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00002648 return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, DL, PromotedOperand);
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002649}
2650
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002651/// Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can fold the operation
2652/// into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing mode and return
2653/// true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002654/// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or
2655/// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success.
2656/// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing
2657/// because it has been moved away.
2658/// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions.
2659/// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away.
2660/// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must
2661/// not be referenced anymore.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002662bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002663 unsigned Depth,
2664 bool *MovedAway) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002665 // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees.
2666 if (Depth >= 5) return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002667
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002668 // By default, all matched instructions stay in place.
2669 if (MovedAway)
2670 *MovedAway = false;
2671
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002672 switch (Opcode) {
2673 case Instruction::PtrToInt:
2674 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002675 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00002676 case Instruction::IntToPtr: {
2677 auto AS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
2678 auto PtrTy = MVT::getIntegerVT(DL.getPointerSizeInBits(AS));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002679 // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized.
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00002680 if (TLI.getValueType(DL, AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) == PtrTy)
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002681 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002682 return false;
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00002683 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002684 case Instruction::BitCast:
2685 // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is
2686 // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something).
2687 if ((AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isPointerTy() ||
2688 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntegerTy()) &&
2689 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. These were probably put here by LSR,
2690 // and we don't want to mess around with them. Assume it knows what it
2691 // is doing.
2692 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType())
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002693 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002694 return false;
Matt Arsenaultf05b0232015-05-26 16:59:43 +00002695 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: {
2696 unsigned SrcAS
2697 = AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
2698 unsigned DestAS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace();
2699 if (TLI.isNoopAddrSpaceCast(SrcAS, DestAS))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002700 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth);
Matt Arsenaultf05b0232015-05-26 16:59:43 +00002701 return false;
2702 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002703 case Instruction::Add: {
2704 // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS. If so, we win.
2705 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2706 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002707 // Start a transaction at this point.
2708 // The LHS may match but not the RHS.
2709 // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially
2710 // matched operation.
2711 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
2712 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
2713
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002714 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) &&
2715 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002716 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002717
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002718 // Restore the old addr mode info.
2719 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2720 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002721 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002722
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002723 // Otherwise this was over-aggressive. Try merging in the LHS then the RHS.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002724 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) &&
2725 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002726 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002727
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002728 // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in.
2729 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2730 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002731 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002732 break;
2733 }
2734 //case Instruction::Or:
2735 // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD.
2736 //break;
2737 case Instruction::Mul:
2738 case Instruction::Shl: {
2739 // Can only handle X*C and X << C.
2740 ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1));
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00002741 if (!RHS)
2742 return false;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002743 int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue();
2744 if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl)
2745 Scale = 1LL << Scale;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002746
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002747 return matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002748 }
2749 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: {
2750 // Scan the GEP. We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most
2751 // one variable offset.
2752 int VariableOperand = -1;
2753 unsigned VariableScale = 0;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002754
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002755 int64_t ConstantOffset = 0;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002756 gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst);
2757 for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) {
2758 if (StructType *STy = dyn_cast<StructType>(*GTI)) {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002759 const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002760 unsigned Idx =
2761 cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue();
2762 ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx);
2763 } else {
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00002764 uint64_t TypeSize = DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002765 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) {
2766 ConstantOffset += CI->getSExtValue()*TypeSize;
2767 } else if (TypeSize) { // Scales of zero don't do anything.
2768 // We only allow one variable index at the moment.
2769 if (VariableOperand != -1)
2770 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002771
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002772 // Remember the variable index.
2773 VariableOperand = i;
2774 VariableScale = TypeSize;
2775 }
2776 }
2777 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002778
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002779 // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset. In this case,
2780 // just add it to the disp field and check validity.
2781 if (VariableOperand == -1) {
2782 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00002783 if (ConstantOffset == 0 ||
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00002784 TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002785 // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002786 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002787 return true;
2788 }
2789 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset;
2790 return false;
2791 }
2792
2793 // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match.
2794 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2795 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
2796
2797 // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target.
2798 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
2799
2800 // Match the base operand of the GEP.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002801 if (!matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002802 // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register.
2803 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
2804 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2805 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2806 return false;
2807 }
2808 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
2809 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
2810 }
2811
2812 // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002813 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002814 Depth)) {
2815 // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register
2816 // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale.
2817 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2818 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2819 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg)
2820 return false;
2821 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
2822 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0);
2823 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002824 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand),
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002825 VariableScale, Depth)) {
2826 // If even that didn't work, bail.
2827 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2828 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2829 return false;
2830 }
2831 }
2832
2833 return true;
2834 }
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002835 case Instruction::SExt:
2836 case Instruction::ZExt: {
2837 Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst);
2838 if (!Ext)
Sanjay Pateld3bbfa12014-07-16 22:40:28 +00002839 return false;
Sanjay Patelab60d042014-07-16 21:08:10 +00002840
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002841 // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002842 // Ask for a method for doing so.
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002843 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH =
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00002844 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedInsts, TLI, PromotedInsts);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002845 if (!TPH)
2846 return false;
2847
2848 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
2849 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002850 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0;
2851 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00002852 Value *PromotedOperand =
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002853 TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002854 // SExt has been moved away.
2855 // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is
2856 // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point.
2857 // E.g.,
2858 // op = add opnd, 1
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002859 // idx = ext op
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002860 // addr = gep base, idx
2861 // is now:
Quentin Colombetf5485bb2014-11-13 01:44:51 +00002862 // promotedOpnd = ext opnd <- no match here
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002863 // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1 <- match (later in recursive calls)
2864 // addr = gep base, op <- match
2865 if (MovedAway)
2866 *MovedAway = true;
2867
2868 assert(PromotedOperand &&
2869 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
2870
2871 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2872 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
2873
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002874 if (!matchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) ||
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002875 // The total of the new cost is equals to the cost of the created
2876 // instructions.
2877 // The total of the old cost is equals to the cost of the extension plus
2878 // what we have saved in the addressing mode.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002879 !isPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00002880 ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize),
Quentin Colombet867c5502014-02-14 22:23:22 +00002881 PromotedOperand)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002882 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2883 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
2884 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n");
2885 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
2886 return false;
2887 }
2888 return true;
2889 }
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002890 }
2891 return false;
2892}
2893
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002894/// If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current addressing mode.
2895/// If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and leaves AddrMode
2896/// unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type or intptr_t
2897/// for the target.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002898///
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002899bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002900 // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching
2901 // fails.
2902 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
2903 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002904 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) {
2905 // Fold in immediates if legal for the target.
2906 AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue();
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00002907 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002908 return true;
2909 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue();
2910 } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) {
2911 // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002912 if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002913 AddrMode.BaseGV = GV;
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00002914 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002915 return true;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002916 AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002917 }
2918 } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) {
2919 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode;
2920 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size();
2921
2922 // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002923 bool MovedAway = false;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002924 if (matchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) {
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002925 // This instruction may have been move away. If so, there is nothing
2926 // to check here.
2927 if (MovedAway)
2928 return true;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002929 // Okay, it's possible to fold this. Check to see if it is actually
2930 // *profitable* to do so. We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing
2931 // register pressure too much.
2932 if (I->hasOneUse() ||
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002933 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002934 AddrModeInsts.push_back(I);
2935 return true;
2936 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002937
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002938 // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back.
2939 //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I;
2940 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode;
2941 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize);
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002942 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002943 }
2944 } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) {
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00002945 if (matchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002946 return true;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002947 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002948 } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) {
2949 // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode.
2950 return true;
2951 }
2952
2953 // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :)
2954 if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) {
2955 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true;
2956 AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr;
2957 // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r].
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00002958 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002959 return true;
2960 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002961 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002962 }
2963
2964 // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r].
2965 if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) {
2966 AddrMode.Scale = 1;
2967 AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr;
Mehdi Amini0cdec1e2015-07-09 02:09:40 +00002968 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002969 return true;
2970 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00002971 AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002972 }
2973 // Couldn't match.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00002974 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002975 return false;
2976}
2977
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00002978/// Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified inline asm call are due
2979/// to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise return false.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002980static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal,
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00002981 const TargetMachine &TM) {
2982 const Function *F = CI->getParent()->getParent();
2983 const TargetLowering *TLI = TM.getSubtargetImpl(*F)->getTargetLowering();
2984 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI = TM.getSubtargetImpl(*F)->getRegisterInfo();
Eric Christopherd75c00c2015-02-26 22:38:34 +00002985 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
Mehdi Amini8ac7a9d2015-07-07 19:07:19 +00002986 TLI->ParseConstraints(F->getParent()->getDataLayout(), TRI,
2987 ImmutableCallSite(CI));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002988 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
2989 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00002990
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002991 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00002992 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00002993
2994 // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory
2995 // operand, we can't fold it!
2996 if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal &&
2997 (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory ||
2998 !OpInfo.isIndirect))
2999 return false;
3000 }
3001
3002 return true;
3003}
3004
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003005/// Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a memory use.
3006/// If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true.
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003007/// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003008static bool FindAllMemoryUses(
3009 Instruction *I,
3010 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses,
3011 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts, const TargetMachine &TM) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003012 // If we already considered this instruction, we're done.
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00003013 if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003014 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003015
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003016 // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out.
3017 if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I))
3018 return true;
3019
3020 // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003021 for (Use &U : I->uses()) {
3022 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003023
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003024 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) {
3025 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo()));
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003026 continue;
3027 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003028
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003029 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) {
3030 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo();
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003031 if (opNo == 0) return true; // Storing addr, not into addr.
3032 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo));
3033 continue;
3034 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003035
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003036 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) {
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003037 InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue());
3038 if (!IA) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003039
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003040 // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out.
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003041 if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TM))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003042 return true;
3043 continue;
3044 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003045
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003046 if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TM))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003047 return true;
3048 }
3049
3050 return false;
3051}
3052
3053/// ValueAlreadyLiveAtInst - Retrn true if Val is already known to be live at
3054/// the use site that we're folding it into. If so, there is no cost to
3055/// include it in the addressing mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values
3056/// that we know are live at the instruction already.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003057bool AddressingModeMatcher::valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003058 Value *KnownLive2) {
3059 // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live!
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003060 if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003061 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003062
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003063 // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live.
3064 if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003065
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003066 // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is
3067 // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is
3068 // live for the whole function.
3069 if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val))
3070 if (AI->isStaticAlloca())
3071 return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003072
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003073 // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's
3074 // block. If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we
3075 // can reasonably fold it.
3076 return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent());
3077}
3078
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003079/// It is possible for the addressing mode of the machine to fold the specified
3080/// instruction into a load or store that ultimately uses it.
3081/// However, the specified instruction has multiple uses.
3082/// Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it
3083/// into the load. For example, consider this code:
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003084///
3085/// X = ...
3086/// Y = X+1
3087/// use(Y) -> nonload/store
3088/// Z = Y+1
3089/// load Z
3090///
3091/// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z
3092/// (yielding load [X+2]). However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to
3093/// be live at the use(Y) line. If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one
3094/// fewer register. Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the
3095/// number of computations either.
3096///
3097/// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic. If
3098/// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to
3099/// fold the addressing mode in the Z case. This would make Y die earlier.
3100bool AddressingModeMatcher::
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003101isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore,
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003102 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) {
3103 if (IgnoreProfitability) return true;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003104
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003105 // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it,
3106 // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded. Get
3107 // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those
3108 // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this
3109 // address extends the lifetime of.
3110 //
3111 // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here,
3112 // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any
3113 // folded immediates).
3114 Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003115
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003116 // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their
3117 // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003118 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003119 BaseReg = nullptr;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003120 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg))
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003121 ScaledReg = nullptr;
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003122
3123 // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live
3124 // ranges, we're ok with it.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003125 if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003126 return true;
3127
3128 // If all uses of this instruction are ultimately load/store/inlineasm's,
3129 // check to see if their addressing modes will include this instruction. If
3130 // so, we can fold it into all uses, so it doesn't matter if it has multiple
3131 // uses.
3132 SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses;
3133 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts;
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003134 if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TM))
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003135 return false; // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use!
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003136
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003137 // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of
3138 // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded
3139 // into a memory use, loop over each of these uses and see if they could
3140 // *actually* fold the instruction.
3141 SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts;
3142 for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3143 Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first;
3144 unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003145
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003146 // Get the access type of this use. If the use isn't a pointer, we don't
3147 // know what it accesses.
3148 Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003149 PointerType *AddrTy = dyn_cast<PointerType>(Address->getType());
3150 if (!AddrTy)
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003151 return false;
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003152 Type *AddressAccessTy = AddrTy->getElementType();
3153 unsigned AS = AddrTy->getAddressSpace();
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003154
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003155 // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This
3156 // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will
3157 // *actually* cover the shared instruction.
3158 ExtAddrMode Result;
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00003159 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3160 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003161 AddressingModeMatcher Matcher(MatchedAddrModeInsts, TM, AddressAccessTy, AS,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003162 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts,
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003163 PromotedInsts, TPT);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003164 Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003165 bool Success = Matcher.matchAddr(Address, 0);
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003166 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?");
3167
Quentin Colombet5a69dda2014-02-11 01:59:02 +00003168 // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not
3169 // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped
3170 // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state.
3171 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3172
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003173 // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it.
3174 if (std::find(MatchedAddrModeInsts.begin(), MatchedAddrModeInsts.end(),
3175 I) == MatchedAddrModeInsts.end())
3176 return false;
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003177
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003178 MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear();
3179 }
Stephen Lin837bba12013-07-15 17:55:02 +00003180
Chandler Carruthc8925912013-01-05 02:09:22 +00003181 return true;
3182}
3183
3184} // end anonymous namespace
3185
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003186/// Return true if the specified values are defined in a
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003187/// different basic block than BB.
3188static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) {
3189 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V))
3190 return I->getParent() != BB;
3191 return false;
3192}
3193
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003194/// Load and Store Instructions often have addressing modes that can do
3195/// significant amounts of computation. As such, instruction selection will try
3196/// to get the load or store to do as much computation as possible for the
3197/// program. The problem is that isel can only see within a single block. As
3198/// such, we sink as much legal addressing mode work into the block as possible.
Chris Lattner728f9022008-11-25 07:09:13 +00003199///
3200/// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory
3201/// operands.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003202bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr,
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003203 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace) {
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003204 Value *Repl = Addr;
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003205
3206 // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes. This is necessary to undo
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003207 // unprofitable PRE transformations.
Cameron Zwarich43cecb12011-01-03 06:33:01 +00003208 SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist;
3209 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003210 worklist.push_back(Addr);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003211
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003212 // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI nodes, and ensure that
3213 // the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI roots of the graph
3214 // are equivalent.
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003215 Value *Consensus = nullptr;
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00003216 unsigned NumUsesConsensus = 0;
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00003217 bool IsNumUsesConsensusValid = false;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003218 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts;
3219 ExtAddrMode AddrMode;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003220 TypePromotionTransaction TPT;
3221 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3222 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003223 while (!worklist.empty()) {
3224 Value *V = worklist.back();
3225 worklist.pop_back();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003226
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003227 // Break use-def graph loops.
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00003228 if (!Visited.insert(V).second) {
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003229 Consensus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003230 break;
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003231 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003232
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003233 // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values.
3234 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) {
Pete Cooper833f34d2015-05-12 20:05:31 +00003235 for (Value *IncValue : P->incoming_values())
3236 worklist.push_back(IncValue);
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003237 continue;
3238 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003239
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003240 // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed.
3241 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> NewAddrModeInsts;
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003242 ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match(
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00003243 V, AccessTy, AddrSpace, MemoryInst, NewAddrModeInsts, *TM,
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003244 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT);
Cameron Zwarich13c885d2011-03-05 08:12:26 +00003245
3246 // This check is broken into two cases with very similar code to avoid using
3247 // getNumUses() as much as possible. Some values have a lot of uses, so
3248 // calling getNumUses() unconditionally caused a significant compile-time
3249 // regression.
3250 if (!Consensus) {
3251 Consensus = V;
3252 AddrMode = NewAddrMode;
3253 AddrModeInsts = NewAddrModeInsts;
3254 continue;
3255 } else if (NewAddrMode == AddrMode) {
3256 if (!IsNumUsesConsensusValid) {
3257 NumUsesConsensus = Consensus->getNumUses();
3258 IsNumUsesConsensusValid = true;
3259 }
3260
3261 // Ensure that the obtained addressing mode is equivalent to that obtained
3262 // for all other roots of the PHI traversal. Also, when choosing one
3263 // such root as representative, select the one with the most uses in order
3264 // to keep the cost modeling heuristics in AddressingModeMatcher
3265 // applicable.
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00003266 unsigned NumUses = V->getNumUses();
3267 if (NumUses > NumUsesConsensus) {
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003268 Consensus = V;
Cameron Zwarichb7f8eaa2011-03-01 21:13:53 +00003269 NumUsesConsensus = NumUses;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003270 AddrModeInsts = NewAddrModeInsts;
3271 }
3272 continue;
3273 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003274
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003275 Consensus = nullptr;
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003276 break;
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003277 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003278
Owen Anderson8ba5f392010-11-27 08:15:55 +00003279 // If the addressing mode couldn't be determined, or if multiple different
3280 // ones were determined, bail out now.
Quentin Colombet3a4bf042014-02-06 21:44:56 +00003281 if (!Consensus) {
3282 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3283 return false;
3284 }
3285 TPT.commit();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003286
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003287 // Check to see if any of the instructions supersumed by this addr mode are
3288 // non-local to I's BB.
3289 bool AnyNonLocal = false;
3290 for (unsigned i = 0, e = AddrModeInsts.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner6d71b7f2008-11-26 03:20:37 +00003291 if (IsNonLocalValue(AddrModeInsts[i], MemoryInst->getParent())) {
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003292 AnyNonLocal = true;
3293 break;
3294 }
3295 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003296
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003297 // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything.
3298 if (!AnyNonLocal) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00003299 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found local addrmode: " << AddrMode << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003300 return false;
3301 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003302
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003303 // Insert this computation right after this user. Since our caller is
3304 // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are
3305 // guaranteed to happen later.
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003306 IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003307
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003308 // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know
3309 // that we have to sink it into this block. Check to see if we have already
3310 // done this for some other load/store instr in this block. If so, reuse the
3311 // computation.
3312 Value *&SunkAddr = SunkAddrs[Addr];
3313 if (SunkAddr) {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00003314 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00003315 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003316 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
Benjamin Kramer547b6c52011-09-27 20:39:19 +00003317 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateBitCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
Eric Christopherfccff372015-01-27 01:01:38 +00003318 } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs ||
3319 (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM &&
Eric Christopher2c635492015-01-27 07:54:39 +00003320 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*MemoryInst->getParent()->getParent())
3321 ->useAA())) {
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003322 // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This
3323 // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities.
3324 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00003325 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003326 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003327 Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003328
3329 // First, find the pointer.
3330 if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
3331 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003332 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003333 }
3334
3335 if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
3336 // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a
3337 // pointer (both of which seem meaningless).
3338 if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1)
3339 return false;
3340
3341 ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
3342 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
3343 }
3344
3345 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
3346 if (ResultPtr)
3347 return false;
3348
3349 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV;
3350 }
3351
3352 // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher
3353 // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case,
3354 // use it here.
3355 if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) {
3356 ResultPtr =
3357 Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003358 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr;
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003359 } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) {
3360 ResultPtr =
3361 Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
3362 AddrMode.Scale = 0;
3363 }
3364
3365 if (!ResultPtr &&
3366 !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
3367 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
3368 } else if (!ResultPtr) {
3369 return false;
3370 } else {
3371 Type *I8PtrTy =
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00003372 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace());
3373 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty();
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003374
3375 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
3376 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
3377 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
3378 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
3379 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
3380 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
3381 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
3382 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
3383 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
3384
3385 ResultIndex = V;
3386 }
3387
3388 // Add the scale value.
3389 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
3390 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
3391 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
3392 // done.
3393 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
3394 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
3395 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
3396 } else {
3397 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
3398 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
3399 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
3400 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
3401 // do not match instead of extending it.
3402 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(ResultIndex);
3403 if (I && (ResultIndex != AddrMode.BaseReg))
3404 I->eraseFromParent();
3405 return false;
3406 }
3407
3408 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
3409 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
3410 "sunkaddr");
3411 if (ResultIndex)
3412 ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr");
3413 else
3414 ResultIndex = V;
3415 }
3416
3417 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
3418 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
3419 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
3420 if (ResultIndex) {
NAKAMURA Takumif51a34e2014-10-29 15:23:11 +00003421 // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with
3422 // SDAG consecutive load/store merging.
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003423 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
3424 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00003425 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003426 }
3427
3428 ResultIndex = V;
3429 }
3430
3431 if (!ResultIndex) {
3432 SunkAddr = ResultPtr;
3433 } else {
3434 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy)
3435 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateBitCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy);
David Blaikie3909da72015-03-30 20:42:56 +00003436 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr");
Hal Finkelc3998302014-04-12 00:59:48 +00003437 }
3438
3439 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType())
3440 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateBitCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType());
3441 }
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003442 } else {
David Greene74e2d492010-01-05 01:27:11 +00003443 DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode << " for "
Louis Gerbarg1b91aa22014-05-13 21:54:22 +00003444 << *MemoryInst << "\n");
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00003445 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType());
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003446 Value *Result = nullptr;
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00003447
3448 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address
3449 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it
3450 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be
3451 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then
3452 // we'd end up sinking both muls.
3453 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) {
3454 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg;
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00003455 if (V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003456 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00003457 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003458 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr");
Dan Gohmanca194452010-01-19 22:45:06 +00003459 Result = V;
3460 }
3461
3462 // Add the scale value.
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003463 if (AddrMode.Scale) {
3464 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg;
3465 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) {
3466 // done.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00003467 } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003468 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003469 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() <
3470 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003471 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003472 } else {
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00003473 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math
3474 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since
3475 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when
3476 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths
3477 // do not match instead of extending it.
Joey Gouly12a8bf02014-05-13 15:42:45 +00003478 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result);
Jim Grosbach83b44e12014-04-10 00:27:45 +00003479 if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg))
3480 I->eraseFromParent();
Jim Grosbached2cd392014-03-26 17:27:01 +00003481 return false;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003482 }
3483 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003484 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale),
3485 "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003486 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003487 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003488 else
3489 Result = V;
3490 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003491
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003492 // Add in the BaseGV if present.
3493 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) {
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003494 Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003495 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003496 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003497 else
3498 Result = V;
3499 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003500
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003501 // Add in the Base Offset if present.
3502 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) {
Owen Andersonedb4a702009-07-24 23:12:02 +00003503 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs);
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003504 if (Result)
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003505 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003506 else
3507 Result = V;
3508 }
3509
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00003510 if (!Result)
Owen Anderson5a1acd92009-07-31 20:28:14 +00003511 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType());
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003512 else
Devang Patelc10e52a2011-09-06 18:49:53 +00003513 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr");
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003514 }
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003515
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003516 MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr);
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00003517
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00003518 // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions
3519 // using it.
Owen Andersondfb8c3b2010-11-19 22:15:03 +00003520 if (Repl->use_empty()) {
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00003521 // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator.
3522 // Use a WeakVH to hold onto it in case this happens.
3523 WeakVH IterHandle(CurInstIterator);
3524 BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003525
Benjamin Kramer8bcc9712012-08-29 15:32:21 +00003526 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo);
Chris Lattneraf1bcce2011-04-09 07:05:44 +00003527
3528 if (IterHandle != CurInstIterator) {
3529 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the
3530 // start of the block.
3531 CurInstIterator = BB->begin();
3532 SunkAddrs.clear();
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003533 }
Dale Johannesenb67a6e662010-03-31 20:37:15 +00003534 }
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00003535 ++NumMemoryInsts;
Chris Lattnerfeee64e2007-04-13 20:30:56 +00003536 return true;
3537}
3538
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003539/// If there are any memory operands, use OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their
3540/// address computing into the block when possible / profitable.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003541bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) {
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003542 bool MadeChange = false;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003543
Eric Christopher11e4df72015-02-26 22:38:43 +00003544 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI =
3545 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getParent()->getParent())->getRegisterInfo();
Mehdi Amini8ac7a9d2015-07-07 19:07:19 +00003546 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints =
3547 TLI->ParseConstraints(*DL, TRI, CS);
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00003548 unsigned ArgNo = 0;
John Thompson1094c802010-09-13 18:15:37 +00003549 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3550 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i];
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00003551
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003552 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use.
Dale Johannesence97d552010-06-25 21:55:36 +00003553 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue());
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003554
Eli Friedman666bbe32008-02-26 18:37:49 +00003555 if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory &&
3556 OpInfo.isIndirect) {
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00003557 Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++);
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003558 MadeChange |= optimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType(), ~0u);
Dale Johannesenf95f59a2010-09-16 18:30:55 +00003559 } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput)
3560 ArgNo++;
Evan Cheng1da25002008-02-26 02:42:37 +00003561 }
3562
3563 return MadeChange;
3564}
3565
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003566/// \brief Check if all the uses of \p Inst are equivalent (or free) zero or
3567/// sign extensions.
3568static bool hasSameExtUse(Instruction *Inst, const TargetLowering &TLI) {
3569 assert(!Inst->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use");
3570 const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
3571 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser);
3572 Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType();
3573 for (const User *U : Inst->users()) {
3574 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
3575 if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI)))
3576 return false;
3577 Type *CurTy = UI->getType();
3578 // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE.
3579 if (CurTy == ExtTy)
3580 continue;
3581
3582 // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation:
3583 // a = Inst
3584 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
3585 // c = sext ty1 a to ty3
3586 // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into:
3587 // a = Inst
3588 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2
3589 // c = sext ty2 b to ty3
3590 // However, the last sext is not free.
3591 if (IsSExt)
3592 return false;
3593
3594 // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another.
3595 // In that case, we would not account for a different use.
3596 Type *NarrowTy;
3597 Type *LargeTy;
3598 if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >
3599 CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) {
3600 NarrowTy = CurTy;
3601 LargeTy = ExtTy;
3602 } else {
3603 NarrowTy = ExtTy;
3604 LargeTy = CurTy;
3605 }
3606
3607 if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy))
3608 return false;
3609 }
3610 // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free.
3611 return true;
3612}
3613
3614/// \brief Try to form ExtLd by promoting \p Exts until they reach a
3615/// load instruction.
3616/// If an ext(load) can be formed, it is returned via \p LI for the load
3617/// and \p Inst for the extension.
3618/// Otherwise LI == nullptr and Inst == nullptr.
3619/// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to
3620/// revert them.
3621///
3622/// \return true when promoting was necessary to expose the ext(load)
3623/// opportunity, false otherwise.
3624///
3625/// Example:
3626/// \code
3627/// %ld = load i32* %addr
3628/// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4
3629/// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64
3630/// \endcode
3631/// =>
3632/// \code
3633/// %ld = load i32* %addr
3634/// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64
3635/// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4
3636/// \encode
3637/// Thanks to the promotion, we can match zext(load i32*) to i64.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003638bool CodeGenPrepare::extLdPromotion(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT,
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003639 LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst,
3640 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts,
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003641 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003642 // Iterate over all the extensions to see if one form an ext(load).
3643 for (auto I : Exts) {
3644 // Check if we directly have ext(load).
3645 if ((LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0)))) {
3646 Inst = I;
3647 // No promotion happened here.
3648 return false;
3649 }
3650 // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion.
3651 if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion)
3652 continue;
3653 // Get the action to perform the promotion.
3654 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = TypePromotionHelper::getAction(
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003655 I, InsertedInsts, *TLI, PromotedInsts);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003656 // Check if we can promote.
3657 if (!TPH)
3658 continue;
3659 // Save the current state.
3660 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3661 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3662 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts;
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003663 unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0;
3664 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003665 // Promote.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003666 Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost,
3667 &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003668 assert(PromotedVal &&
3669 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases");
3670
3671 // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load.
3672 // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically
3673 // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality.
3674 // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge
3675 // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going,
3676 // because the new extension may be removed too.
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003677 long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost;
3678 TotalCreatedInstsCost -= ExtCost;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003679 if (!StressExtLdPromotion &&
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003680 (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 ||
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003681 !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, *DL, PromotedVal))) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003682 // The promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state.
3683 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3684 continue;
3685 }
3686 // The promotion is profitable.
3687 // Check if it exposes an ext(load).
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003688 (void)extLdPromotion(TPT, LI, Inst, NewExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost);
Quentin Colombet1b274f92015-03-10 21:48:15 +00003689 if (LI && (StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost ||
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003690 // If we have created a new extension, i.e., now we have two
3691 // extensions. We must make sure one of them is merged with
3692 // the load, otherwise we may degrade the code quality.
3693 (LI->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(LI, *TLI))))
3694 // Promotion happened.
3695 return true;
3696 // If this does not help to expose an ext(load) then, rollback.
3697 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
3698 }
3699 // None of the extension can form an ext(load).
3700 LI = nullptr;
3701 Inst = nullptr;
3702 return false;
3703}
3704
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003705/// Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same basic block as the load,
3706/// unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows SelectionDAG to fold the
3707/// extend into the load.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003708/// \p I[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some
3709/// promotions apply.
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003710///
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003711bool CodeGenPrepare::moveExtToFormExtLoad(Instruction *&I) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003712 // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form
3713 // an extended load.
3714 TypePromotionTransaction TPT;
3715 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood =
3716 TPT.getRestorationPoint();
3717 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts;
3718 Exts.push_back(I);
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003719 // Look for a load being extended.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003720 LoadInst *LI = nullptr;
3721 Instruction *OldExt = I;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003722 bool HasPromoted = extLdPromotion(TPT, LI, I, Exts);
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003723 if (!LI || !I) {
3724 assert(!HasPromoted && !LI && "If we did not match any load instruction "
3725 "the code must remain the same");
3726 I = OldExt;
3727 return false;
3728 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003729
3730 // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003731 // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote.
3732 // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable.
3733 if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == I->getParent())
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003734 return false;
3735
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00003736 EVT VT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, I->getType());
3737 EVT LoadVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, LI->getType());
Ahmed Bougacha55e3c2d2014-12-05 18:04:40 +00003738
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003739 // If the load has other users and the truncate is not free, this probably
3740 // isn't worthwhile.
Ahmed Bougacha55e3c2d2014-12-05 18:04:40 +00003741 if (!LI->hasOneUse() && TLI &&
3742 (TLI->isTypeLegal(LoadVT) || !TLI->isTypeLegal(VT)) &&
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003743 !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), LI->getType())) {
3744 I = OldExt;
3745 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003746 return false;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003747 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003748
3749 // Check whether the target supports casts folded into loads.
3750 unsigned LType;
3751 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I))
3752 LType = ISD::ZEXTLOAD;
3753 else {
3754 assert(isa<SExtInst>(I) && "Unexpected ext type!");
3755 LType = ISD::SEXTLOAD;
3756 }
Ahmed Bougacha2b6917b2015-01-08 00:51:32 +00003757 if (TLI && !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(LType, VT, LoadVT)) {
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003758 I = OldExt;
3759 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood);
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003760 return false;
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003761 }
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003762
3763 // Move the extend into the same block as the load, so that SelectionDAG
3764 // can fold it.
Quentin Colombetfc2201e2014-12-17 01:36:17 +00003765 TPT.commit();
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003766 I->removeFromParent();
3767 I->insertAfter(LI);
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00003768 ++NumExtsMoved;
Dan Gohman99429a02009-10-16 20:59:35 +00003769 return true;
3770}
3771
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003772bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) {
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003773 BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent();
3774
Bob Wilsonff714f92010-09-21 21:44:14 +00003775 // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003776 // other uses of the source with result of extension.
3777 Value *Src = I->getOperand(0);
3778 if (Src->hasOneUse())
3779 return false;
3780
Evan Cheng2011df42007-12-13 07:50:36 +00003781 // Only do this xform if truncating is free.
Gabor Greifaa261722008-02-26 19:13:21 +00003782 if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType()))
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00003783 return false;
3784
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00003785 // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00003786 // this block.
3787 if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent())
Evan Cheng7bc89422007-12-12 00:51:06 +00003788 return false;
3789
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003790 bool DefIsLiveOut = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003791 for (User *U : I->users()) {
3792 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003793
3794 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003795 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003796 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3797 DefIsLiveOut = true;
3798 break;
3799 }
3800 if (!DefIsLiveOut)
3801 return false;
3802
Jim Grosbach0f38c1e2013-04-15 17:40:48 +00003803 // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003804 for (User *U : Src->users()) {
3805 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
3806 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Evan Cheng37c36ed2007-12-13 03:32:53 +00003807 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3808 // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing
3809 // reloads just before load / store instructions.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003810 if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI))
Evan Cheng63d33cf2007-12-12 02:53:41 +00003811 return false;
3812 }
3813
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003814 // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once.
3815 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs;
3816
3817 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003818 for (Use &U : Src->uses()) {
3819 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser());
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003820
3821 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
3822 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent();
3823 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3824
3825 // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use.
3826 Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB];
3827
3828 if (!InsertedTrunc) {
Bill Wendling8ddfc092011-08-16 20:45:24 +00003829 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003830 InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", InsertPt);
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00003831 InsertedInsts.insert(InsertedTrunc);
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003832 }
3833
3834 // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003835 U = InsertedTrunc;
Cameron Zwarichced753f2011-01-05 17:27:27 +00003836 ++NumExtUses;
Evan Chengd3d80172007-12-05 23:58:20 +00003837 MadeChange = true;
3838 }
3839
3840 return MadeChange;
3841}
3842
Sanjay Patel4ac6b112015-09-21 22:47:23 +00003843/// Returns true if a SelectInst should be turned into an explicit branch.
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003844static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(SelectInst *SI) {
3845 // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine
3846 // whether a select is better represented as a branch. This requires that
3847 // branch probability metadata is preserved for the select, which is not the
3848 // case currently.
3849
3850 CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition());
3851
3852 // If the branch is predicted right, an out of order CPU can avoid blocking on
3853 // the compare. Emit cmovs on compares with a memory operand as branches to
3854 // avoid stalls on the load from memory. If the compare has more than one use
3855 // there's probably another cmov or setcc around so it's not worth emitting a
3856 // branch.
Sanjay Patel5e5f0e92015-09-28 21:44:46 +00003857 if (!Cmp || !Cmp->hasOneUse())
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003858 return false;
3859
3860 Value *CmpOp0 = Cmp->getOperand(0);
3861 Value *CmpOp1 = Cmp->getOperand(1);
3862
3863 // We check that the memory operand has one use to avoid uses of the loaded
3864 // value directly after the compare, making branches unprofitable.
Sanjay Patel5e5f0e92015-09-28 21:44:46 +00003865 return ((isa<LoadInst>(CmpOp0) && CmpOp0->hasOneUse()) ||
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003866 (isa<LoadInst>(CmpOp1) && CmpOp1->hasOneUse()));
3867}
3868
3869
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00003870/// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction,
3871/// turn it into a branch.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003872bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI) {
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00003873 bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1);
3874
3875 // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ?
3876 if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI || VectorCond)
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003877 return false;
3878
Nadav Rotem9d832022012-09-02 12:10:19 +00003879 TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind;
3880 if (VectorCond)
3881 SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect;
3882 else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy())
3883 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal;
3884 else
3885 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect;
3886
3887 // Do we have efficient codegen support for this kind of 'selects' ?
3888 if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind)) {
3889 // We have efficient codegen support for the select instruction.
3890 // Check if it is profitable to keep this 'select'.
3891 if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive() ||
3892 !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(SI))
3893 return false;
3894 }
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00003895
3896 ModifiedDT = true;
3897
3898 // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks.
3899 BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent();
3900 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(SI));
3901 BasicBlock *NextBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end");
3902
3903 // Create a new block serving as the landing pad for the branch.
3904 BasicBlock *SmallBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.mid",
3905 NextBlock->getParent(), NextBlock);
3906
3907 // Move the unconditional branch from the block with the select in it into our
3908 // landing pad block.
3909 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3910 BranchInst::Create(NextBlock, SmallBlock);
3911
3912 // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition.
3913 BranchInst::Create(NextBlock, SmallBlock, SI->getCondition(), SI);
3914
3915 // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node.
3916 PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", NextBlock->begin());
3917 PN->takeName(SI);
3918 PN->addIncoming(SI->getTrueValue(), StartBlock);
3919 PN->addIncoming(SI->getFalseValue(), SmallBlock);
3920 SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN);
3921 SI->eraseFromParent();
3922
3923 // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block.
3924 CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end();
3925 ++NumSelectsExpanded;
3926 return true;
3927}
3928
Benjamin Kramer573ff362014-03-01 17:24:40 +00003929static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003930 SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask());
3931 int SplatElem = -1;
3932 for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) {
3933 if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem)
3934 return false;
3935 SplatElem = Mask[i];
3936 }
3937
3938 return true;
3939}
3940
3941/// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same
3942/// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases
3943/// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that
3944/// codegen can spot all lanes are identical.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00003945bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) {
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003946 BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent();
3947
3948 // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive.
3949 if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType()))
3950 return false;
3951
3952 // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a
3953 // constant splat.
3954 if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI))
3955 return false;
3956
3957 // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once.
3958 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles;
3959
3960 bool MadeChange = false;
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003961 for (User *U : SVI->users()) {
3962 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003963
3964 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003965 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent();
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003966 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue;
3967
3968 // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003969 if (!UI->isShift()) continue;
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003970
3971 // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't
3972 // already have a copy.
3973 Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB];
3974
3975 if (!InsertedShuffle) {
3976 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt();
3977 InsertedShuffle = new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0),
3978 SVI->getOperand(1),
3979 SVI->getOperand(2), "", InsertPt);
3980 }
3981
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003982 UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00003983 MadeChange = true;
3984 }
3985
3986 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle.
3987 if (SVI->use_empty()) {
3988 SVI->eraseFromParent();
3989 MadeChange = true;
3990 }
3991
3992 return MadeChange;
3993}
3994
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00003995namespace {
3996/// \brief Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one.
3997/// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition.
3998/// E.g.,
3999/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
4000/// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0
4001/// c = scalar_op b
4002/// store c
4003///
4004/// =>
4005/// a = vector_op <2 x i32>
4006/// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane)
4007/// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0
4008/// * store d
4009/// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the
4010/// transition.
4011class VectorPromoteHelper {
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004012 /// DataLayout associated with the current module.
4013 const DataLayout &DL;
4014
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004015 /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations.
4016 const TargetLowering &TLI;
4017
4018 /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain.
4019 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
4020
4021 /// The transition being moved downwards.
4022 Instruction *Transition;
4023 /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted.
4024 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted;
4025 /// Cost of combining a store and an extract.
4026 unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost;
4027 /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition.
4028 Instruction *CombineInst;
4029
4030 /// \brief The instruction that represents the current end of the transition.
4031 /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain
4032 /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition.
4033 Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const {
4034 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty())
4035 return Transition;
4036 return InstsToBePromoted.back();
4037 }
4038
4039 /// \brief Return the index of the original value in the transition.
4040 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value,
4041 /// c, is at index 0.
4042 unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const {
4043 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
4044 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
4045 return 0;
4046 }
4047
4048 /// \brief Return the index of the index in the transition.
4049 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index
4050 /// is at index 1.
4051 unsigned getTransitionIdx() const {
4052 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) &&
4053 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet");
4054 return 1;
4055 }
4056
4057 /// \brief Get the type of the transition.
4058 /// This is the type of the original value.
4059 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the
4060 /// transition is <2 x i32>.
4061 Type *getTransitionType() const {
4062 return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType();
4063 }
4064
4065 /// \brief Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through.
4066 /// I.e., we have the following sequence:
4067 /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2>
4068 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ...
4069 /// =>
4070 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ...
4071 /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2>
4072 void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted);
4073
4074 /// \brief Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the
4075 /// instructions enqueued to be promoted.
4076 bool isProfitableToPromote() {
4077 Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
4078 unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)
4079 ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue()
4080 : -1;
4081 Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType();
4082
4083 StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst);
4084 unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace();
4085 unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment();
4086 // Check if this store is supported.
4087 if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004088 TLI.getValueType(DL, ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS,
4089 Align)) {
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004090 // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine
4091 // the extract with the store.
4092 return false;
4093 }
4094
4095 // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition
4096 // scalar to vector.
4097 // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost.
4098 uint64_t ScalarCost =
4099 TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index);
4100 uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost;
4101 for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) {
4102 // Compute the cost.
4103 // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones.
4104 // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat
4105 // constant.
4106 Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0);
4107 bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) ||
4108 isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0);
4109 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK =
4110 IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
4111 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
4112 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK =
4113 !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue
4114 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue;
4115 ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(
4116 Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
4117 VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType,
4118 Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK);
4119 }
4120 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: "
4121 << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n');
4122 return ScalarCost > VectorCost;
4123 }
4124
4125 /// \brief Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same
4126 /// number of elements as the transition.
4127 /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated
Benjamin Kramerdf005cb2015-08-08 18:27:36 +00004128 /// across the whole vector.
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004129 /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>,
4130 /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible:
4131 /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only
4132 /// used at the index of the extract.
4133 Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const {
4134 unsigned ExtractIdx = UINT_MAX;
4135 if (!UseSplat) {
4136 // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to
4137 // use a splat constant.
4138 Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx());
4139 if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx))
4140 ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue();
4141 else
4142 UseSplat = true;
4143 }
4144
4145 unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements();
4146 if (UseSplat)
4147 return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val);
4148
4149 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec;
4150 UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType());
4151 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) {
4152 if (Idx == ExtractIdx)
4153 ConstVec.push_back(Val);
4154 else
4155 ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal);
4156 }
4157 return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec);
4158 }
4159
4160 /// \brief Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx
4161 /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior.
4162 static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use,
4163 unsigned OperandIdx) {
4164 // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on
4165 // the right hand side of a division-like instruction.
4166 if (OperandIdx != 1)
4167 return false;
4168 switch (Use->getOpcode()) {
4169 default:
4170 return false;
4171 case Instruction::SDiv:
4172 case Instruction::UDiv:
4173 case Instruction::SRem:
4174 case Instruction::URem:
4175 return true;
4176 case Instruction::FDiv:
4177 case Instruction::FRem:
4178 return !Use->hasNoNaNs();
4179 }
4180 llvm_unreachable(nullptr);
4181 }
4182
4183public:
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004184 VectorPromoteHelper(const DataLayout &DL, const TargetLowering &TLI,
4185 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, Instruction *Transition,
4186 unsigned CombineCost)
4187 : DL(DL), TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition),
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004188 StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost), CombineInst(nullptr) {
4189 assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null");
4190 }
4191
4192 /// \brief Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type.
4193 bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
4194 // We could support CastInst too.
4195 return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted);
4196 }
4197
4198 /// \brief Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted
4199 /// by moving downward the transition through.
4200 bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const {
4201 // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded.
4202 // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions.
4203 for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
4204 const Value *Val = U.get();
4205 if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) {
4206 // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs,
4207 // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a
4208 // division by zero.
4209 if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()))
4210 return false;
4211 continue;
4212 }
4213 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) &&
4214 !isa<ConstantFP>(Val))
4215 return false;
4216 }
4217 // Check that the resulting operation is legal.
4218 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode());
4219 if (!ISDOpcode)
4220 return false;
4221 return StressStoreExtract ||
Ahmed Bougacha026600d2014-11-12 23:05:03 +00004222 TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004223 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, getTransitionType(), true));
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004224 }
4225
4226 /// \brief Check whether or not \p Use can be combined
4227 /// with the transition.
4228 /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse?
4229 bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); }
4230
4231 /// \brief Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted.
4232 void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
4233 InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted);
4234 }
4235
4236 /// \brief Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition.
4237 void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) {
4238 assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine");
4239 CombineInst = ToBeCombined;
4240 }
4241
4242 /// \brief Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is
4243 /// is profitable.
4244 /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise.
4245 bool promote() {
4246 // Check if there is something to promote.
4247 // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with,
4248 // we assume the promotion is not profitable.
4249 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst)
4250 return false;
4251
4252 // Check cost.
4253 if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote())
4254 return false;
4255
4256 // Promote.
4257 for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted)
4258 promoteImpl(ToBePromoted);
4259 InstsToBePromoted.clear();
4260 return true;
4261 }
4262};
4263} // End of anonymous namespace.
4264
4265void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) {
4266 // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def
4267 // can be statically promoted.
4268 // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted:
4269 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a
4270 // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2
4271 // Move the transition down.
4272 // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition.
4273 // = ... b => = ... Def.
4274 assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() &&
4275 "The type of the result of the transition does not match "
4276 "the final type");
4277 ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition);
4278 // 2. Update the type of the uses.
4279 // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def.
4280 Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType();
4281 ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy);
4282 // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted
4283 // operands.
4284 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a.
4285 for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) {
4286 Value *Val = U.get();
4287 Value *NewVal = nullptr;
4288 if (Val == Transition)
4289 NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx());
4290 else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) ||
4291 isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) {
4292 // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef.
4293 NewVal = getConstantVector(
4294 cast<Constant>(Val),
4295 isa<UndefValue>(Val) ||
4296 canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo()));
4297 } else
Craig Topperd3c02f12015-01-05 10:15:49 +00004298 llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update "
4299 "this?");
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004300 ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal);
4301 }
4302 Transition->removeFromParent();
4303 Transition->insertAfter(ToBePromoted);
4304 Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted);
4305}
4306
4307/// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction.
4308/// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target
4309/// has this feature and this is profitable.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004310bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) {
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004311 unsigned CombineCost = UINT_MAX;
4312 if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI ||
4313 (!StressStoreExtract &&
4314 !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(),
4315 Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost)))
4316 return false;
4317
4318 // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition.
4319 // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until:
4320 // - We can combine the transition with its single use
4321 // => we got rid of the transition.
4322 // - We escape the current basic block
4323 // => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and
4324 // we do not do that for now.
4325 BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent();
4326 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n');
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004327 VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*DL, *TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost);
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004328 // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be
4329 // beneficial.
4330 while (Inst->hasOneUse()) {
4331 Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin());
4332 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
4333
4334 if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) {
4335 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block ("
4336 << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName()
4337 << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName() << ").\n");
4338 return false;
4339 }
4340
4341 if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) {
4342 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n'
4343 << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n');
4344 VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted);
4345 bool Changed = VPH.promote();
4346 NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed;
4347 return Changed;
4348 }
4349
4350 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n");
4351 if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted))
4352 return false;
4353
4354 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n");
4355
4356 VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted);
4357 Inst = ToBePromoted;
4358 }
4359 return false;
4360}
4361
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004362bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Ahmed Bougachaf3299142015-06-17 20:44:32 +00004363 // Bail out if we inserted the instruction to prevent optimizations from
4364 // stepping on each other's toes.
4365 if (InsertedInsts.count(I))
4366 return false;
4367
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004368 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
4369 // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG)
4370 // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up. If we detect such a
4371 // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here.
Mehdi Amini4fe37982015-07-07 18:45:17 +00004372 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, *DL, TLInfo, nullptr)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004373 P->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
4374 P->eraseFromParent();
4375 ++NumPHIsElim;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004376 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004377 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004378 return false;
4379 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004380
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004381 if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004382 // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have
4383 // already been constant folded. The only reason NOT to constant fold
4384 // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant
4385 // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist
4386 // the address of globals out of a loop). If this is the case, we don't
4387 // want to forward-subst the cast.
4388 if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0)))
4389 return false;
4390
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004391 if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI, *DL))
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004392 return true;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004393
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004394 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00004395 /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't
4396 /// fit in one register
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004397 if (TLI &&
4398 TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(),
4399 TLI->getValueType(*DL, CI->getType())) ==
4400 TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) {
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00004401 return SinkCast(CI);
4402 } else {
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004403 bool MadeChange = moveExtToFormExtLoad(I);
4404 return MadeChange | optimizeExtUses(I);
Manuel Jacoba7c48f92014-03-13 13:36:25 +00004405 }
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004406 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004407 return false;
4408 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004409
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004410 if (CmpInst *CI = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
Hal Finkeldecb0242014-01-02 21:13:43 +00004411 if (!TLI || !TLI->hasMultipleConditionRegisters())
4412 return OptimizeCmpExpression(CI);
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004413
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004414 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) {
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +00004415 stripInvariantGroupMetadata(*LI);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004416 if (TLI) {
4417 unsigned AS = LI->getPointerAddressSpace();
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004418 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType(), AS);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004419 }
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004420 return false;
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004421 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004422
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004423 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) {
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +00004424 stripInvariantGroupMetadata(*SI);
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004425 if (TLI) {
4426 unsigned AS = SI->getPointerAddressSpace();
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004427 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1),
Matt Arsenaultf72b49b2015-06-04 16:17:38 +00004428 SI->getOperand(0)->getType(), AS);
4429 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004430 return false;
4431 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004432
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00004433 BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I);
4434
4435 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr ||
4436 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) {
4437 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1));
4438 if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn())
Mehdi Amini44ede332015-07-09 02:09:04 +00004439 return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI, *DL);
Yi Jiangd069f632014-04-21 19:34:27 +00004440
4441 return false;
4442 }
4443
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004444 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) {
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00004445 if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) {
4446 /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast
4447 Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(),
4448 GEPI->getName(), GEPI);
4449 GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC);
4450 GEPI->eraseFromParent();
4451 ++NumGEPsElim;
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004452 optimizeInst(NC, ModifiedDT);
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004453 return true;
Cameron Zwarichd28c78e2011-01-06 02:44:52 +00004454 }
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004455 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004456 }
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004457
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004458 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004459 return optimizeCallInst(CI, ModifiedDT);
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004460
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00004461 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004462 return optimizeSelectInst(SI);
Benjamin Kramer047d7ca2012-05-05 12:49:22 +00004463
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00004464 if (ShuffleVectorInst *SVI = dyn_cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004465 return optimizeShuffleVectorInst(SVI);
Tim Northoveraeb8e062014-02-19 10:02:43 +00004466
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004467 if (isa<ExtractElementInst>(I))
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004468 return optimizeExtractElementInst(I);
Quentin Colombetc32615d2014-10-31 17:52:53 +00004469
Chris Lattneree588de2011-01-15 07:29:01 +00004470 return false;
Cameron Zwarich14ac8652011-01-06 02:37:26 +00004471}
4472
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00004473// In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used
4474// across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time
4475// selection.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004476bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool& ModifiedDT) {
Cameron Zwarichce3b9302011-01-06 00:42:50 +00004477 SunkAddrs.clear();
Cameron Zwarich5dd2aa22011-03-02 03:31:46 +00004478 bool MadeChange = false;
Eric Christopherc1ea1492008-09-24 05:32:41 +00004479
Chris Lattner7a277142011-01-15 07:14:54 +00004480 CurInstIterator = BB.begin();
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00004481 while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) {
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004482 MadeChange |= optimizeInst(CurInstIterator++, ModifiedDT);
Elena Demikhovsky87700a72014-12-28 08:54:45 +00004483 if (ModifiedDT)
4484 return true;
4485 }
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004486 MadeChange |= dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB);
Benjamin Kramer455fa352012-11-23 19:17:06 +00004487
Chris Lattnerf2836d12007-03-31 04:06:36 +00004488 return MadeChange;
4489}
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004490
4491// llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able
Nadav Rotem465834c2012-07-24 10:51:42 +00004492// handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004493// find a node corresponding to the value.
Sanjay Patelfc580a62015-09-21 23:03:16 +00004494bool CodeGenPrepare::placeDbgValues(Function &F) {
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004495 bool MadeChange = false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00004496 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) {
Craig Topperc0196b12014-04-14 00:51:57 +00004497 Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5914a972015-01-08 20:44:33 +00004498 for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe90f1162015-01-08 21:07:55 +00004499 Instruction *Insn = BI++;
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004500 DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn);
Adrian Prantl32da8892014-04-25 20:49:25 +00004501 // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These
4502 // instrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca)
4503 // being taken. They should not be moved next to the alloca
4504 // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to
4505 // where said address is used.
4506 if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) {
Devang Patel53771ba2011-08-18 00:50:51 +00004507 PrevNonDbgInst = Insn;
4508 continue;
4509 }
4510
4511 Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue());
4512 if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) {
4513 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n" << *DVI << ' ' << *VI);
4514 DVI->removeFromParent();
4515 if (isa<PHINode>(VI))
4516 DVI->insertBefore(VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt());
4517 else
4518 DVI->insertAfter(VI);
4519 MadeChange = true;
4520 ++NumDbgValueMoved;
4521 }
4522 }
4523 }
4524 return MadeChange;
4525}
Tim Northovercea0abb2014-03-29 08:22:29 +00004526
4527// If there is a sequence that branches based on comparing a single bit
4528// against zero that can be combined into a single instruction, and the
4529// target supports folding these into a single instruction, sink the
4530// mask and compare into the branch uses. Do this before OptimizeBlock ->
4531// OptimizeInst -> OptimizeCmpExpression, which perturbs the pattern being
4532// searched for.
4533bool CodeGenPrepare::sinkAndCmp(Function &F) {
4534 if (!EnableAndCmpSinking)
4535 return false;
4536 if (!TLI || !TLI->isMaskAndBranchFoldingLegal())
4537 return false;
4538 bool MadeChange = false;
4539 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(), E = F.end(); I != E; ) {
4540 BasicBlock *BB = I++;
4541
4542 // Does this BB end with the following?
4543 // %andVal = and %val, #single-bit-set
4544 // %icmpVal = icmp %andResult, 0
4545 // br i1 %cmpVal label %dest1, label %dest2"
4546 BranchInst *Brcc = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4547 if (!Brcc || !Brcc->isConditional())
4548 continue;
4549 ICmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(Brcc->getOperand(0));
4550 if (!Cmp || Cmp->getParent() != BB)
4551 continue;
4552 ConstantInt *Zero = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Cmp->getOperand(1));
4553 if (!Zero || !Zero->isZero())
4554 continue;
4555 Instruction *And = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cmp->getOperand(0));
4556 if (!And || And->getOpcode() != Instruction::And || And->getParent() != BB)
4557 continue;
4558 ConstantInt* Mask = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1));
4559 if (!Mask || !Mask->getUniqueInteger().isPowerOf2())
4560 continue;
4561 DEBUG(dbgs() << "found and; icmp ?,0; brcc\n"); DEBUG(BB->dump());
4562
4563 // Push the "and; icmp" for any users that are conditional branches.
4564 // Since there can only be one branch use per BB, we don't need to keep
4565 // track of which BBs we insert into.
4566 for (Value::use_iterator UI = Cmp->use_begin(), E = Cmp->use_end();
4567 UI != E; ) {
4568 Use &TheUse = *UI;
4569 // Find brcc use.
4570 BranchInst *BrccUser = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(*UI);
4571 ++UI;
4572 if (!BrccUser || !BrccUser->isConditional())
4573 continue;
4574 BasicBlock *UserBB = BrccUser->getParent();
4575 if (UserBB == BB) continue;
4576 DEBUG(dbgs() << "found Brcc use\n");
4577
4578 // Sink the "and; icmp" to use.
4579 MadeChange = true;
4580 BinaryOperator *NewAnd =
4581 BinaryOperator::CreateAnd(And->getOperand(0), And->getOperand(1), "",
4582 BrccUser);
4583 CmpInst *NewCmp =
4584 CmpInst::Create(Cmp->getOpcode(), Cmp->getPredicate(), NewAnd, Zero,
4585 "", BrccUser);
4586 TheUse = NewCmp;
4587 ++NumAndCmpsMoved;
4588 DEBUG(BrccUser->getParent()->dump());
4589 }
4590 }
4591 return MadeChange;
4592}
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004593
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004594/// \brief Retrieve the probabilities of a conditional branch. Returns true on
4595/// success, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was found.
4596static bool extractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
4597 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
4598 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
4599 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
4600 auto *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
4601 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3)
4602 return false;
4603
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +00004604 const auto *CITrue =
4605 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
4606 const auto *CIFalse =
4607 mdconst::dyn_extract<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004608 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse)
4609 return false;
4610
4611 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
4612 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
4613
4614 return true;
4615}
4616
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004617/// \brief Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t.
4618static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) {
4619 uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse;
4620 uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / UINT32_MAX) + 1;
4621 NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale;
4622 NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale;
4623}
4624
4625/// \brief Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like:
4626/// \code
4627/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
4628/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
4629/// %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1
4630/// br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
4631/// \endcode
4632/// into multiple branch instructions like:
4633/// \code
4634/// bb1:
4635/// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0
4636/// br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2
4637/// bb2:
4638/// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0
4639/// br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB
4640/// \endcode
4641/// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations
4642/// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is
4643/// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions.
4644///
4645/// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG.
4646///
4647bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F) {
David Blaikiedc3f01e2015-03-09 01:57:13 +00004648 if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive())
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004649 return false;
4650
4651 bool MadeChange = false;
4652 for (auto &BB : F) {
4653 // Does this BB end with the following?
4654 // %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
4655 // %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ...
4656 // %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2
4657 // br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2"
4658 BinaryOperator *LogicOp;
4659 BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB;
4660 if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB)))
4661 continue;
4662
Sanjay Patel42574202015-09-02 19:23:23 +00004663 auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator());
4664 if (Br1->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable))
4665 continue;
4666
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004667 unsigned Opc;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004668 Value *Cond1, *Cond2;
4669 if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
4670 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004671 Opc = Instruction::And;
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004672 else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)),
4673 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2)))))
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004674 Opc = Instruction::Or;
4675 else
4676 continue;
4677
4678 if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ||
4679 !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) )
4680 continue;
4681
4682 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump());
4683
4684 // Create a new BB.
4685 auto *InsertBefore = std::next(Function::iterator(BB))
4686 .getNodePtrUnchecked();
4687 auto TmpBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(),
4688 BB.getName() + ".cond.split",
4689 BB.getParent(), InsertBefore);
4690
4691 // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the
4692 // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004693 Br1->setCondition(Cond1);
4694 LogicOp->eraseFromParent();
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004695
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004696 // Depending on the conditon we have to either replace the true or the false
4697 // successor of the original branch instruction.
4698 if (Opc == Instruction::And)
4699 Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB);
4700 else
4701 Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB);
4702
4703 // Fill in the new basic block.
4704 auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB);
Juergen Ributzka8bda7382014-12-09 17:50:10 +00004705 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) {
4706 I->removeFromParent();
4707 I->insertBefore(Br2);
4708 }
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004709
4710 // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be
4711 // replaced in one succesor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from
4712 // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one
4713 // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target
4714 // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition
4715 // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that
4716 // we perfrom the correct update for the PHI nodes.
4717 // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch
4718 // instruction (or any other instruction).
4719 if (Opc == Instruction::Or)
4720 std::swap(TBB, FBB);
4721
4722 // Replace the old BB with the new BB.
4723 for (auto &I : *TBB) {
4724 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
4725 if (!PN)
4726 break;
4727 int i;
4728 while ((i = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0)
4729 PN->setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB);
4730 }
4731
4732 // Add another incoming edge form the new BB.
4733 for (auto &I : *FBB) {
4734 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(&I);
4735 if (!PN)
4736 break;
4737 auto *Val = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB);
4738 PN->addIncoming(Val, TmpBB);
4739 }
4740
4741 // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder::
4742 // FindMergedConditions).
4743 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) {
4744 // Codegen X | Y as:
4745 // BB1:
4746 // jmp_if_X TBB
4747 // jmp TmpBB
4748 // TmpBB:
4749 // jmp_if_Y TBB
4750 // jmp FBB
4751 //
4752
4753 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB.
4754 // The requirement is that
4755 // TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB)
4756 // = TrueProb for orignal BB.
4757 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
4758 // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice
4759 // assumes that
4760 // TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB.
4761 // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for
4762 // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated.
4763 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004764 if (extractBranchMetadata(Br1, TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004765 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
4766 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight;
4767 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4768 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
4769 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4770
4771 NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight;
4772 NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight;
4773 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4774 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
4775 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4776 }
4777 } else {
4778 // Codegen X & Y as:
4779 // BB1:
4780 // jmp_if_X TmpBB
4781 // jmp FBB
4782 // TmpBB:
4783 // jmp_if_Y TBB
4784 // jmp FBB
4785 //
4786 // This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB.
4787
4788 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB.
4789 // The requirement is that
4790 // FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB)
4791 // = FalseProb for orignal BB.
4792 // Assuming the orignal weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's
4793 // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice
4794 // assumes that
4795 // FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB.
4796 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight;
Juergen Ributzka194350a2014-12-09 17:32:12 +00004797 if (extractBranchMetadata(Br1, TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) {
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004798 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight;
4799 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
4800 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4801 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext())
4802 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4803
4804 NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight;
4805 NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight;
4806 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight);
4807 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext())
4808 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
4809 }
4810 }
4811
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004812 // Note: No point in getting fancy here, since the DT info is never
Quentin Colombet7bdd50d2015-03-18 23:17:28 +00004813 // available to CodeGenPrepare.
Juergen Ributzkac1bbcbb2014-12-09 16:36:13 +00004814 ModifiedDT = true;
4815
4816 MadeChange = true;
4817
4818 DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump();
4819 TmpBB->dump());
4820 }
4821 return MadeChange;
4822}
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +00004823
4824void CodeGenPrepare::stripInvariantGroupMetadata(Instruction &I) {
Piotr Padlewskiea092882015-09-17 20:25:07 +00004825 if (auto *InvariantMD = I.getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group))
Piotr Padlewski6c15ec42015-09-15 18:32:14 +00004826 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata(InvariantMD->getMetadataID());
4827}